CarMaker
®
Cover
Reference Manual Version 2.1
2
The information in this document is furnished for informational use only, may be revised from time to time, and should not be construed as a commitment by IPG Automotive GmbH. IPG Automotive GmbH assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document. This document contains proprietary and copyrighted information and may not be copied, reproduced, translated, or reduced to any electronic medium without prior consent, in writing, from IPG Automotive GmbH. © 1999 - 2006 by IPG Automotive GmbH – www.ipg-automotive.com All rights reserved. FailSafeTester, IPG-CAR, IPG-CONTROL, IPG-DRIVER, IPG-ENGINE, IPG-GRAPH, IPGKINEMATICS, IPG-LOCK, IPG-MOTORCYCLE, IPG-MOVIE, IPG-ROAD, IPG-ROADDATA, IPG-TIRE, IPG-TRAILER, IPG-TRUCK are trademarks of IPG Automotive GmbH. CarMaker, TruckMaker, MotorcycleMaker, MESA VERDE are registered trademarks of IPG Automotive GmbH. All other product names are trademarks of their respective companies.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
1
Contents
1
Introduction
9
1.1
General Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.2
CarMaker Axis Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.3
CarMaker Geometry Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Conventions defining CarMaker Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Guidelines defining CarMaker Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.4
CarMaker Naming Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 CarMaker Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Classification of Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Meaning of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.5
CarMaker Directory Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.6
About Parameter Files and Datasets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Database Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 FileIdent, Description and FileCreator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Model Kind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 CarMaker Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.7
‘SimParameters’ File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Application Parameters of CarMaker/HIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 CarMaker Environment Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Data Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Maneuver Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Start of test run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
2
End of test run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2
1.8
‘ECUParameters’ File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.9
‘OutputQuantities’ File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.10
General Parameters for TestRun Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1.11
Software Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Driving Maneuvers
32
2.1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2.2
Longitudinal Dynamics Maneuvers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Speed Control (VelControl) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.3
Lateral Dynamics Maneuvers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.4
Special Maneuvers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 The first Mini Maneuver (Duration 0 Seconds) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 The last Mini Maneuver (Duration 0 Seconds) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2.5
3
User Accessible Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Vehicle Body 3.1
38
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Configuration of the vehicle model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Finding the equilibrium state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Vehicle Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Interaction with other modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.2
General Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.3
Mass Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.4
4
5
User Accessible Quantities for Vehicle Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Suspension Force Elements
46
4.1
External Suspension Forces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4.2
Springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4.3
Dampers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4.4
Buffers / Bumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
4.5
Suspension Roll Stabilizer / Anti-Roll Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance 5.1
60
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Describing Kinematics with Generalized Coordinates . . . . . . . 65 Brief Introduction to the Measurement Procedure of K&C parameters
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
3
68 5.2
Kinematics and Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
5.3
Kinematics Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 “Linear” and “Linear2D” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 “MapNL” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 “SetZero” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
5.4
Compliance Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 “CoeffConstFr1” and “CoeffConstFr2” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 “SetZero” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 “CoeffLin1DFr1” and “CoeffLin1DFr2” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 “DisplaceLinFr1” and “DisplaceLinFr2” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Example: Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
6
Aerodynamics
84
6.1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
6.2
General Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
6.3
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 ‘Coeff6x1’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
7
Steering System 7.1
88
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Steer by Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Steer by Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
7.2
Steering System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 General Steering System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Steering System ’Classic’ Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
8
7.3
User Accessible Quantities for Steering Systems . . . . . . . . . . . 93
7.4
Steering System Software Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
PowerTrain 8.1
95
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Interface Powertrain – Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 PowerTrain Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Interfaces of Powertrain Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 General Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
8.2
Powertrain ’Generic’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 General Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Model ‘Generic’ Differential Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
4
Model ‘Generic’ Coupling Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 8.3
Engine Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Engine Torque Model ‘Mapping’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Engine Torque Model ‘Linear’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Engine Torque Model ‘DVA’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Engine Model Software Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
8.4
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Clutch Model ‘Manual’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Clutch Model ‘Converter’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Clutch Model ‘DVA’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
8.5
Gear Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 GearBox Model ‘Manual’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 GearBox Model ‘DVA’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
9
8.6
User Accessible Quantities for PowerTrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
8.7
Powertrain Software Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Brake System 9.1
135
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Brake Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
9.2
Brake System Software Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
9.3
General Brake System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
9.4
User Accessible Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 General User Accessible Quantities for Brake Systems
9.5
. . . . 140
Brake System PresDistrib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Brake System PresDistrib Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
9.6
Brake System HydESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Brake circuit configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Brake booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Wheel brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Volume elements in general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Wheel brake cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Low pressure accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Attenuators (damper chambers) and line volumes . . . . . . . . . 164 Hydraulic pump (return pump) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Valves and Connecting Lines in General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Solenoid valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
5
Proportional Solenoid Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Dynamic Solenoid Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Inlet Valves with check valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Pilot valve with check valve and pressure limiting valve . . . . . 179 Suction valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Check Valve of the Low Pressure Accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . 182 User Accessible Quantities for Brake Module ‘HydESP’ . . . . 186
10
Tire
188
10.1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Tire Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Tire load (normal force) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Tire Model Computations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
10.2
General Tire Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
10.3
Tire Model RT-Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Rolling Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Importing Tire Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
10.4
Tire Model Magic Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 The basics of Magic Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Tire Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Scale factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Effective tire rolling radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Slip computation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Longitudinal force (pure longitudinal slip): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Lateral force (pure side slip): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Aligning Torque (pure side slip) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Longitudinal Force (combined slip) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Lateral force (combined slip) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Aligning Torque (combined slip) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Overturning Couple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Rolling Resistance Moment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Transient Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Gyroscopic couple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Friction coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
11
CarMaker Reference Manual
Trailer Model
232
11.1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
11.2
General Trailer Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
11.3
Mass Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Version 2.1.6
6
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 11.4
Suspension Force Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Stabilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
11.5
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Sleeve Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Crank Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Semi Trailing Arm Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 General Suspension Model Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Additional Parameters for Suspension Model “Sleeve” . . . . . . 243 Additional Parameters for Suspension Model “Crank” . . . . . . 243 Additional Parameters for Suspension Model “SemiTrailingArm” . . 244 Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
11.6
Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Additional Parameters for Hitch “Ball” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Additional Parameters for Hitch “Trapez” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Additional Parameters for Hitch “BallFric” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Additional Parameters for Hitch “BallDamp” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
11.7
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Additional Parameters for Brake Model “Overrun” . . . . . . . . . 251 Additional Parameters for Brake Model “Overrun1” . . . . . . . . 252
11.8
Aerodynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
11.9
User Accessible Quantities for Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 General User Accessible Quantities: Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
12
User Accessible Quantities 12.1
General User Accessible Quantities
257 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
User Accessible Quantities: Driving Maneuvers 12.2
. . . . . . . . . . 259
User Accessible Quantities for Vehicle Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 User Accessible Quantities: Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 User Accessible Quantities: Car (for unexperienced users) . . 261
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
7
User Accessible Quantities: Car 12.3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
User Accessible Quantities: Power Train . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 User Accessible Quantities for PowerTrain
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
User Accessible Quantities for PowerTrain ‘Generic’ . . . . . . . 268 User Accessible Quantities for Module ‘Engine’ . . . . . . . . . . . 269 User Accessible Quantities for Module ‘Clutch’ . . . . . . . . . . . 269 User Accessible Quantities for Module ‘GearBox’ . . . . . . . . . 270 12.4
User Accessible Quantities: Steering Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 General User Accessible Quantities: Steering Systems
12.5
. . . . 271
User Accessible Quantities: Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 General User Accessible Quantities for Brake Systems
. . . . 272
User Accessible Quantities for Brake Module ‘HydESP’ . . . . 274 12.6
User Accessible Quantities: Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 General User Accessible Quantities: Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
12.7
A
B
UAQ´s changed from CM 2.0 to CM 2.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Appendix
281
Mini-Maneuver Command Language
282
A.1
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
A.2
Driving Maneuver Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
A.3
Direct Variable Access Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
A.4
Action Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
A.5
Logging Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
A.6
FailSafeTester Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Traffic-Obstacles B.1
291
Parameters and Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Motion of an Obstacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Output Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
B.2
Functions, Types and Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Obsts_New() - create a new obstacle management . . . . . . 300 Obsts_ObstclNew() - create an new obstacle . . . . . . . . . . 300 Obsts_iGetObstcl() - get obstacle from infofile . . . . . . . . 300 Obsts_ObstclAdd() - add a new obstacle . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Obsts_ObstclGetInfo()-getsinformationaboutdefinedobstacle 301 Obsts_ObstclDelete() - delete an obstacle . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Obsts_EndOfInput() - no additional obstacles . . . . . . . . 301 Obsts_ObstVecNew() - get a obstacle output vector . . . . . 302
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
8
Obsts_Calc() - calculate the obstacle module . . . . . . . . . . 303 Obsts_GetObstsAbs() - get absolute obstacle states . . . . 303 Obsts_GetObstsRel() - get relative obstacle states . . . . . 304 Obsts_ObstVecDelete() - free obstacle output vector . . . 304 Obsts_Delete() - free obstacle management . . . . . . . . . . 304 Example: Using Obstalces “by Hand” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 B.3
CarMaker Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Obstacles_Init() - initailizes obstacle module . . . . . . . . . 306 Obstacles_New() - create obstalces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Obstacles_Calc () - calculate obstacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Obstacles_Delete () - delete obstacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Obstacles_Cleanup() - cleanup obstacle module . . . . . . 307 Examples: Using Obstacles by CarMaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
B.4
C
IPG-MOVIE C.1
D
310
312
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Road-Obstacles and Markers E.1
309
IPG-MOVIE-INFO – Meta Information in Geometry Files . . . . 310
Start Conditions D.1
E
Obstacle Utility obstutil . . . . . . . . . . . .
313
Description of Road-Obstacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Waves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Cones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
E.2
Description of Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Pylons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Velocity Signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 SideWind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
E.3
CarMaker Reference Manual
Description of Digitized Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Version 2.1.6
Introduction
9
General Remarks
Chapter 1
Introduction
This is the CarMaker Reference Manual. It contains definitive informations about the usage of the different tools and modules bundled in the CarMaker software package.
1.1
General Remarks CarMaker tries to keep as close as possible to conventions and naming of ISO 8855 1991, modified (or US English DIN 70000). This applies amongst other issues to axis systems, kinematics of the sprung mass, forces and moments, suspension, vehicle response and wheels and tires. All parameters and quantities are specified in SI-quantities unless otherwise stated: Table 1.1: SI Units used with CarMaker Quantity
Name
Symbol
Time
second
s
Length
meter
m
Angle
radian (one turn = 2*π)
rad
Mass
kilogram
kg
Inertia
kilogram meter sqared
kg*m2
Force
newton
N
Torque
newton meter
Nm
Stiffness
newton per meter
N/m
Rotational Stiffness
newton meter per radian
Nm/rad
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Introduction
10
CarMaker Axis Systems
1.2
CarMaker Axis Systems In the virtual world of CarMaker different axis systems for different purposes are used. They are used to simplify calculation and parametrization for CarMaker objects (including signals and variables) and to be able to represent different points of views for CarMaker objects.
y
z
z
Fr1 Mntrl f ( q 0, q 1 )
Fr2 y x
Mntrr f (t) z
f ( q 0, q 1 )
z
Fr2
Fr2
f ( q 0, q 1 )
y
Mntfl
x
z
Fr2
z
Mntfr
y x
x
f ( q 0, q 1 ) y x
y
Fr0 x Figure 1.1: CarMaker Coordinate systems
Frame Fr0 The CarMaker inertial axis system is called Fr0 (pronounced: frame zero). This is the earth fixed origin of the ‘virtual world’. Fr0 is defined as follows: •
(O) is the origin, (X), (Y), (Z) are the 3 axis.
•
(O, X, Y) is the horizontal driving plane (road).
•
(Z) is directed upwards (mathematically: ( X ) × ( Y ) ).
•
The position of any point, if not mentioned explicitly otherwise, is expressed in Fr0.
Frame Fr1 Moving objects in the virtual world are based on their own accompanied axis system which is called Fr1. This axis system is fixed to the moving object. This means that the axis system performs all movements of the attached object like translations and rotations. Fr1 is defined as follows: •
(X) points in forward driving direction.
•
(Y) points to the left.
•
(Z) is directed upwards (mathematically: ( X ) × ( Y ) ).
•
In case of a vehicle no part of the outer skin is situated behind the (O, Y, Z)-plane. At least one point of the outer skin has a vanishing X-coordinate. (see section 1.3)
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Introduction
11
CarMaker Axis Systems
•
In case of a trailer no part of the outer skin is situated before the (O, Y, Z)-plane. (see section 1.3)
Frame Fr2 (carrier axis system) For every wheel there is a mountpoint (Mnt) defined within the Fr1 system. This is the center of reference of a Fr2 axis system attached to this mount-point. Mount-points are pure translations (X,Y,Z) from the Fr1 axis system. They are fixed to the Fr1 system. There are functional dependencies (suspension kinematics and compliance) how Fr2 is orientated relatively to its mount-point. There are two generalized coordinates (q 0,q 1) for the movement of each Fr2 axis system. Usually q 0 stands for compression and q 1 for steer influence. Fr2 is defined as follows: •
Rules apply to any of the wheel carriers
•
(O) is the center of the wheel. It is in the wheel plane.
•
(X) points in forward driving direction.
•
(Y) is along the wheel spin axis. Vector points to the left.
•
(Z) is directed upwards (mathematically: ( X ) × ( Y ) ).
•
Initially (all coordinates of Fr2 are zero) Fr2 is parallel to Fr1.
•
(O, X, Z) is the wheel plane.
Frame FrX The frame FrX (pronounced: cross frame) represents a road surface axis system. The (O, X, Y) -plane approximately describes the current orientation of the road surface. Like Fr1 this is a accompanied axis system as well and moves uniformly to Fr1. FrX is defined as follows: •
(O) is located in the middle between the two road surface contact points of the rear wheels.
•
(X) is orientated from (O) to the middle of the two road surface points of the front wheels.
•
(Y) is orientated along the connection from the rear left to the rear right road surface contact point.
•
(Z) is oriented upwards (mathematically: ( X ) × ( Y ) ).
Frame FrD The FrD (pronounced: design-frame) is a parallel axis system to Fr1 with different origin. It is used to specify geometry input coordinates which are based on a different origin than Fr1 without recomputing them. See section 1.3.2 ’Guidelines defining CarMaker Objects’ on page 12. FrD is defined as follows: •
(O) is arbitrary
•
(X) is parallel to Fr1 (X) axis.
•
(Y) is parallel to Fr1 (Y) axis.
•
(Z) is parallel to Fr1 (Z) axis.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Introduction
12
CarMaker Geometry Input
1.3
CarMaker Geometry Input To define new objects (vehicles, trailers) a good understanding of the CarMaker principles and conventions is needed to obtain the expected results. The information provided in this section is very useful for this task.
1.3.1
Conventions defining CarMaker Objects As a convention CarMaker objects have to be defined with their origin of Fr1 at designated positions. This is important because CarMaker assumes the origin at those designated places for every object. The following table shows the conventions where the origin for which objects has to be:. Table 1.2: Origins of CarMaker Fr1 Objects
1.3.2
Type of Fr1
Origin
Vehicle
Origin for the vehicles Fr1 is the hindmost point of the vehicle projected on road level.
Trailer
Origin for the trailers Fr1 is the hitch point (foremost point) of the trailer projected on road level. (Trailer objects have negative X-coordinates).
Guidelines defining CarMaker Objects To define a new CarMaker object geometry data has to be provided. Geometry data e. g. is needed for body mass, mount-points for (carrier-)frames, and additional loads (inclusive trimloads and engine mass).
loads
engine
trimloads
Fr2FrontLeft vehicle body
Fr2RearLeft MntRearRight
Fr2RearRight
CoM
FrD
MntFrontRight
Fr2FrontRight
r1 in F
orig
Fr1 Fr0 Figure 1.2: CarMaker geometry input for a vehicle
The position and orientation of any point/frame is given in design configuration (‘drawing sheet of the designer of the car’). As shown in Figure 1.2 the axis FrD (called design-frame) is a parallel axis system to Fr1 with different origin. The configurations specified in FrD must be linked to the Fr1 by a vector pointing to the origin of Fr1 (expressed in FrD coordinates).
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Introduction
13
CarMaker Geometry Input
In the special case where FrD ≡ Fr1 the link vector is the zero vector. Design configuration not necessarily has to be equilibrium configuration!
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Introduction
14
CarMaker Naming Conventions
1.4
CarMaker Naming Conventions To ensure maximum readability, it is tried to keep the notation as consistent and self-explanatory as possible.
1.4.1
CarMaker Subsystems The following rules to name CarMaker subsystems apply: Model Abbrev.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Description
Ambient
Ambient constants
Brake
Brake subsystem
Car
Car subsystem
DM
Maneuver control subsystem (DrivMan)
FST
FailSaveTester
IO
IO subsystem
Log
Log subsystem
PT
Powertrain subsystem
Sensor
Vehicle body sensors
Steer
Steering subsystem
TC
Task commands (Minimaneuvers)
TCPU
Monitoring of CPU time consumption
Time
CarMaker timer
Tr
Trailer subsystem
Vhcl
Vehicle means subset of Car, Motorcycle, Truck subsystem
Version 2.1.6
Introduction
15
CarMaker Naming Conventions
1.4.2
Classification of Quantities With the following classifications groups of quantities are denoted. Those groups denote points of interests like the center of mass of components or single components and their significant quantities. The letters
CarMaker Reference Manual
... in general stand for
Aero
Aerodynamic related quantities
Buffer, Buf
Suspension buffer/bumper related quantities
C
Carrier related quantities
Camber
Camber (wheel) related quantities
Clutch
Clutch related quantities
Con
Quantities related to connected body: center of mass of the rigid vehicle body including vehicle body, engine, trimloads and loads
Damp
Damper (shock absorber) related quantities
DL
Driveline related quantities
Engine
Engine related quantities
Fr0, Fr1, Fr2, FrX
Quantities related to this Frame (= axis system)
Gearbox
Gearbox related quantities
Gen
Quantities related to the generalized body: center of mass of generalized body including all masses of the connected body including masses of wheel carriers and wheels. (“Car.Gen”, “Tr.Gen”)
Gen
Powertrain Generic related quantities (“PT.Gen”)
Hitch
Trailer hitch related quantities
HydESP
HydESP brake model related quantities (“Brake.HydESP”)
Jack
Jack related quantities
Load
Extra loads of the vehicle
PoI
Point of interest related quantities
Spring
Suspension spring related quantities
Stabi
Anti-Roll-Bar stabilisator related quantities
Steer
Steer subsystem related quantities
Valve
Brake hydraulic valves related quantities
Virtual
Virtual forces and torques related quantities
W
Wheel related quantities
Version 2.1.6
Introduction
16
CarMaker Naming Conventions
1.4.3
Meaning of Abbreviations CarMaker uses the following abbreviations for the naming of quantities. The letters
CarMaker Reference Manual
... in general stand for
0, 1, 2, 3,..
Numbering
_0, _1, _2
Postfix for quantity expressed in Fr0, Fr1, Fr2
_ext
External
_tot
Total
a
Acceleration
Align
Aligning movement
Axle
Suspension left, right, front, back
C
Center
Diff
Differential
Distance, Dist
Distance
DL
Driveline
F
Front
FL, FR, RL, RR
Front left, front right, rear left, rear right
Frc
Force
Hori
projection of a quantity to the O,X,Y plane
l
Length
l
Lateral
LongSlip
Long slip (tangential) of wheel
Man
Maneuver
MC
Master brake cylinder
muRoad
Friction coefficient
No
Number
P
Tire contact point with track
p
Pressure
q
Flow (hydraulic)
q, q0, q1
Generalized coordinates
r
Rotation
R
Rear
Radius
Radius
Rate
Angular velocity
res
Resultant
rot
Rotation angle
rotv
Rotation angle velocity
Slip
Slip (lateral) of wheel
Spd
Speed
SS, SideSlip
Side slip of vehicle
SW
Switch
t
Translation
T
Tire
Version 2.1.6
Introduction
17
CarMaker Naming Conventions
The letters
CarMaker Reference Manual
... in general stand for
T
Temperature
T, Time
Time
tau
Angle of attack of wind
Trq
Torque
v, vel
Velocity
WB
Wheel brake
x, y, z
Coordinate directions
Version 2.1.6
Introduction
18
CarMaker Directory Structure
1.5
CarMaker Directory Structure Project Directory Below is the directory structure of a typical project directory. Listing 1.1: <project directory path> | |-bin Real-time program, user specific | GUIs, like e. g. Instruments | |-doc Online Docu to simulator | |-src Development environment |-Data Data basis | | | |- Vehicle Vehicle data | |- Chassis Kinematics and Compiance of axles | | | |-Config Configuration of the test bed: ECUParameters, SimParameters, | | OutputQuantities | | | |-Misc Misc., e.g. parameters for the hydraulic | | | |-Pic Views of vehicles (for GUI) | |-Road Measured road definitions (RoadData) | |-TestScript ScriptControl test-scripts | |-TestRun Test runs | |-Tire Tire data | |-Trailer Trailer data | |-Movie Animation, movie | Vehicle and road geometry files | |-SimInput Data for Input_From_File |-SimOutput Results of simulations | |-Offline | |-rt1 | | |-Log | | |-YYYYMMDD
•
The bin directory contains the CarMaker executable or executables. It might also contain custom applications or tools that were created specifically for the project.
•
The doc directory would contain documentation that would apply to the project. CarMaker documentation, e.g this document, does not reside in the doc directory but is included in the CarMaker installation directory along with library files and most of the CIT applications.
•
The src directory includes the C source files that can be modified by the user. By making changes to the source files new CarMaker executables can be built that would incorporate modifications and additional functionality needed for a particular project.
•
The data directory includes all the vehicle parameter files, user and IPG defined testruns, configuration data, and other data used by CarMaker.
•
The movie directory includes files needed for IPG-MOVIE. For example, if a custom car body is used in the animation then the file would be here.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Introduction
19
CarMaker Directory Structure
•
The SimInput directory contains simulation data files that are used when CarMaker runs by using file input.
•
The SimOutput directory contains the simulation results that are optionally saved when a testrun is performed.
Installation Directory It also might be useful to show the CarMaker installation directory, i.e. where the CarMaker tools have been installed, along with the CarMaker libraries and documentation. Shown below is an example of the installation directory of the LynxOS or realtime version of CarMaker, installed in the unix environment. Listing 1.2:
| |-bin Programs like Instruments, | User interface HIL | |-doc Online documentation |-Examples Example projects and files |-GUI Graphical User Interface scripts, executables, etc. |-include Include-files |-lib Libraries |-lynx_rt LynxOS runtime environment |-Matlab Support package for Matlab/Simulink |-Setup Template and definition files
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Introduction
20
About Parameter Files and Datasets
1.6
About Parameter Files and Datasets The CarMaker application needs parameter files and datasets. For this purpose CarMaker uses keyword oriented parameter files called Infofiles. They are plain ascii text files but a specific syntax is used.
1.6.1
Database Syntax Infofiles use keywords which can be followed by
1.6.2
•
a ‘=’ character and several values up to the end of line,
•
a ‘:’ character and a multi line entry in the following lines. Each line must start with a character.
FileIdent, Description and FileCreator To recognize any changes and incompatibilities of parameters format and norm (e. g. using a new CarMaker version with out of date datasets) a identification key for each file is used. The identification key shows the model class, the submodel class and the current version. This identification key is called “FileIdent” and has to be specified in the first line of a parameter file.
FileIdentt = CarMaker-KindString [ VersionId ]
Syntax
CarMaker-<ModelClass>[-]
<ModelClass>
Example Current FileIdents
Tire, Brake, Car, TestRun,... Optional, for submodels with referenced parameters, e.g. separate files for brake model parameters or engine torque diagram. Version of parameter file, whole-numbered, positive
FileIdent = CarMaker-PowerTrain.ET-4WD 2
Currently Carmaker supports the following Fileidents: Infofile
FileIdent
TestRun
CarMaker-TestRun
TestSeries
CarMaker-TestSeries
Tire
CarMaker-Tire-
Car
CarMaker-Car
Suspension (kinematics CarMaker-SuspMapping and compliance)
CarMaker Reference Manual
Trailer
CarMaker-Trailer
Brake
CarMaker-Brake-
ECUParameters
CarMaker-ECUParameters
SimParameters
CarMaker-SimParameters
Version 2.1.6
Introduction
21
About Parameter Files and Datasets
Description :
DescriptionText
Description, displayed in parameter browsers
FileCreator =
String
This entry answers the question: Which tool creates this parameter set? How can it be characterized?
1.6.3
Model Kind The kind key is used to specify a submodel (e. g. a specific powertrain model). Prefix.Kind = KindStr [ VersionId ] KindStr is the characteristic name of submodel, or variation of submodel. VersionId is optional. It is used to support different versions of parameter sets for the same model (compatibility, parameter convertion etc.). Example
1.6.4
PowerTrain.ET.Kind = Mapping 2
CarMaker Configuration Files CarMaker knows the following configuration files: File
Purpose
SimParameters
All parameters influencing the simulation flow.
ECUParameters
Parameters and calibration settings for ECU´s used with a test stand.
OutputQuantities
Specifies list of quantities for saving results in CarMaker.
The files are searched in the sub directory Data/Config/[.hostname]. Example
Data/Config/SimParameters Data/Config/ECUParameters.rt1
If a file with hostname matches it has priority over a file without a specific hostname.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Introduction
22
‘SimParameters’ File
1.7
‘SimParameters’ File In SimParameters all “global” (test run, vehicle, ... independent) simulation specific parameters are given in different subsections decribed below.
1.7.1
Application Parameters of CarMaker/HIL
Cycle.dtLimitHigh = DeltaT Optional. Default 0.002 s.
Cycle.dtLimitLow = DeltaT Optional. Default 0.0001 s.
Cycle.tCTViolationWarn = DeltaT Optional. Default 0.0015 s.
Cycle.tCTViolationErr = DeltaT Optional. Default 0.003 s.
Cycle.maxtCTViolation = DeltaT Optional.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Introduction
23
‘SimParameters’ File
1.7.2
CarMaker Environment Parameters
FirstInit.TestRun = TestRunName Test-run to initialize the application the first time, before a test run is started. Default: ““ to use internal defaults.
TestRunEnd.DVA_ReleaseAll = DoIt At the end of a test run, all active direct variable write access can be closed. Default: 0, don’t release all, keep write access active.
1.7.3
Data Storage
DStore.dtFile = deltaT Optional. Time step between two data vectors for storage. Default 0.02 s.
DStore.OutQuantFName = OutQuantFilename Optional, Configuration file for selecting quantities to be written to file. Filename relative to Data/Config/. Default “OutputQuantities”.
DStore.OutSubDir = DirectoryName Optional. Directory to store simulation results. If DirectoryName is empty, the directory name is created by current date, formatted as <month>. Default ““.
DStore.OutFNameWithTime = WithTime Optional. Append simulation start time to the result file name. Default 1.
DStore.BufSize_kB = Size_in_kBytes Size of data collecting buffer.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Introduction
24
‘SimParameters’ File
1.7.4
Maneuver Control
DrivMan.Engine.AutoStart = AutoStart Optional, default 1.
DrivMan.Engine.tWaitAfterEngineOn =deltaT Optional, default 2.0 s, see also section ’PowerTrain.ET.tWaitAfterEngineOn = deltaT’.
Road.VhclStartPos_TrailerMin =
MinStartPos_m
Optional, default 10 m. Minimal vehicle road start coordinat when driving with a trailer. Get Idle
DrivMan.GetIdle.Brake = DrivMan.GetIdle.Brake.d_dt =
Activation Velocity
Optional, default Activation=0, Velocity=1000.
DrivMan.GetIdle.BrakePark = Activation DrivMan.GetIdle.BrakePark.d_dt = Velocity Optional, default Activation=0, Velocity=1000.
DrivMan.GetIdle.BrakeLever = DrivMan.GetIdle.BrakeLever.d_dt =
Activation Velocity
Optional, default Activation=0, Velocity=1000.
DrivMan.GetIdle.Brake.vVhcl_BrakeEnd =
MaxVhclVelocity
Optional, default 0.1 m/s. Vehicle velocity to end braking while state GetIdle.
DrivMan.GetIdle.dSteerAngledt =
SteerAngleVelocity_deg/s
Optional, default 45 deg. Steer angle velocity to center steering system.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Introduction
25
‘SimParameters’ File
DrivMan.GetIdle.SelectorCtrl =
SelectorCtrl
Optional, default 0. Is Idle
DrivMan.IsIdle.Brake =
Activation
Optional, default 0.0.
DrivMan.IsIdle.BrakeLever =
Activation
Optional, default 0.0.
DrivMan.IsIdle.BrakePark =
Activation
Optional, default 0.0.
DrivMan.IsIdle.SelectorCtrl =
Position
Optional, default 0.
DrivMan.IsIdle.SetNeutral =
SetNeutral
Optional, default 1. Set gear box to neutral position. Shifting
DrivMan.AutoShift.dtDontShift =
delatT
Optional, default 0.2 s.
DrivMan.AutoShift.GasReduction = Reduction Optional, default 0.8.
DrivMan.AutoShift.dt_declutch =
DeltaT
Optional, deafult 0.1 s.
DrivMan.AutoShift.dt_keepclutch = DeltaT Optional, default 0.1 s.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Introduction
26
‘SimParameters’ File
DrivMan.AutoShift. dt_enclutch=
DeltaT
Optional, default 0.5 s.
DrivMan.VelCtrl.tClutchRelease =
value
Optional, default 1.0 s.
1.7.5
Start of test run
SimStart.TimeLimit =
TimeLimit
Maximal duration of state SimStart. Default: 60 s
DrivMan.Start.ExtInp_SteerVel =
SteerVelMax_deg
Used for external inputs maneuvers to build up the steering angle at start of input.
1.7.6
End of test run
GetIdle.TimeLimit =
TimeLimit
Optional. Default 200 s.
GetIdle.Skip =
Skip
Optional. Default: 0 for HIL, 1 for non-HIL.
GetIdle.Kl15Off =
SwitchOff
Optional. Default: 0 for HIL, 1 for non-HIL.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Introduction
27
‘ECUParameters’ File
1.8
‘ECUParameters’ File In ECUParameters all Input/Output, hardware or ECU specific parameters are stored in this parameter set: •
Signal conditioning
•
FailSafeTester configuration, see Programmers Guide section 12.3 ’Configuring the FailSafeTester’ on page 283
•
et al.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Introduction
28
‘OutputQuantities’ File
1.9
‘OutputQuantities’ File This file keeps a simple list with all quantity names (one per line spelled like they can be looked up in IPG Control). All quantities denoted in this file are stored by the CarMaker´s Storage of Results functionality. It is possible to use only one ‘*’ wildcard per pattern.
Example
Brake.Trq_FL Brake.Trq_* Car.*FL
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Introduction
29
General Parameters for TestRun Files
1.10
General Parameters for TestRun Files These Parameters can be specified in a CarMaker TestRun file. They apply for all sub models.
Ambient.Temperature = Temperature_K Optional. Ambient temperature in degree Kelvin. Default 293.15 K.
Ambient.AirDensity = value Optional. Air density in kg/m3. Default 1.205
Ambient.AirPressure = value Optional. Air pressure in bar. Default 1.024 bar.
Ambient.AirHumidity = value Optional. Air humidity (no dimension 0..1). Default 0.2
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Introduction
30
Software Interfaces
1.11
Software Interfaces The vehicle model uses the model manager to “handle models”. This means: For a submodel of the car – for example steering system, brake system, tire, engine, ... – more than one implementation (or model) can be available in the simulation program. The model to be used in a testrun is selected by an identifier string in a parameter file, for example “Brake.Kind = HydESP” in the vehicle parameter set to select the brake model “HydESP”. 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: 19:
int Brake_Register_HydESP (void) { tModelClassDescr m; /* clear model class description structure */ memset (&m, 0, sizeof(m)); /* assign model interface m.Brake.VersionId = m.Brake.CompatVersionId = m.Brake.New = m.Brake.Calc = m.Brake.Delete = m.Brake.DeclQuants =
functions */ ThisVersionId; CompatVersionId; Brake_HydESP_New; Brake_HydESP_Calc; Brake_HydESP_Delete; Brake_HydESP_DeclQuants;
/* register the model, kind string and interface functions */ return Model_Register (ModelClass_Brake, "HydESP", &m); } Listing 1.3:
The model manager supports the following car submodels, called model classes:c 1: typedef enum { 2: ModelClass_PTEngine, 3: ModelClass_PTClutch, 4: ModelClass_PTGearBox, 5: ModelClass_PTDriveLine, 6: ModelClass_PowerTrain, 7: ModelClass_PTGenCoupling, 8: ModelClass_Steering, 9: ModelClass_Brake, 10: ModelClass_Tire, 11: 12: } tModelClass; Listing 1.4: Model Classes
The model manager is initialized at program start with 1: int 2: Model_Init (void);
Models are registered at program start, before the first simulation starts with 3: int 4: Model_Register ( 5: tModelClass 6: const char 7: tModelClassDescr 8: );
CarMaker Reference Manual
ModelClass, *KindStr, *MD
Version 2.1.6
Introduction
31
Software Interfaces
The model manager is cleaned up before program exits with 9: int 10: Model_Cleanup (void);
Example: Registration and usage of a brake model The registration function for the brake model with kind key “HydESP” is called once at program start. What CarMaker does to start a submodel (example for a brake model): •
Look for a model with the corresponding kind string.
•
If the model is found by Model_LookUp() the New() function is called to create an initialized model.
•
If the initialization was successful, the DelcQuants() function is called to update the quantities in CarMaker´s data dictionary.
•
The functions Calc() and Delete() are stored to calculate the model and to delete the model parameters before create a new model at the beginning of next simulation 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: 21: 22: 23: 24: 25: 26: 27: 28: 29: 30: 31:
CarMaker Reference Manual
tModelClassDescr*md; const char *ModelKind; ModelKind = iGetStr(Inf, KindKey); if ((md=Model_LookUp(ModelClass_Brake, ModelKind)) == NULL) { LogErrF (EC_Init, "Brake: Unknown kind ’%s’",KindKey); goto ErrorReturn; } brake.param = md->Brake.New(inf, ““); if (brake.param == NULL) goto ErrorReturn; if (md->Brake.DeclQuants != NULL) md->Brake.DeclQuants (brake.param);
brake.md.Brake.Calc = brake.md.Brake.Delete =
md->Brake.Calc; md->Brake.Delete;
Version 2.1.6
Driving Maneuvers
32
Overview
Chapter 2
Driving Maneuvers
2.1
Overview The CarMaker testrun is build by one or more maneuver steps, called “mini maneuvers”. The mini maneuver events are composed by •
longitudinal dynamics actions: accelerating, braking, gear shifting, ...
•
lateral dynamics actions: steering
•
additional actions, defined by a list of mini maneuver commands
Parameters The driving maneuvers and driving behavior can be configured •
in the test run (test run specific)
•
in the vehicle model parameter set (vehicle specific in)
•
in the SimParameters parameter set (global).
A prefix is build up for each mini maneuver by the string “DrivMan.”, followed by the mini maneuver number. The keys of all parameters for each maneuver starts with this prefix. DrivMan..<xyz> ...
TestRun Data Set
DrivMan.nDMan =
NumberOfMiniMan
This entry defines the number of minimaneuvers of this test run. The first maneuver is the maneuver 0 (zero).
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Driving Maneuvers
33
Overview
Vehicle Data Set
PowerTrain.ET.tWaitAfterEngineOn =
deltaT
Optional. Overwrites parameter DrivMan.Engine.tWaitAfterEngineOn from file SimParameters (see section ’DrivMan.Engine.tWaitAfterEngineOn = deltaT’).
DrivMan.nShift :
GearNo_nUp_nDown_table
Optional. Configures the auto shifting module of the speed controller. Each line contains the following values: •
Gear number GearNo, positive for forward, negative for backward gears
•
engine speed to shift up, unit rpm.
•
engine speed to shift down, unit rpm.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Driving Maneuvers
34
Longitudinal Dynamics Maneuvers
2.2
Longitudinal Dynamics Maneuvers The following maneuvers are available:
2.2.1
•
Drive with IPG-DRIVER
•
Drive speed profile
•
Manual Control: Gas, Brake, BrakeLever (motorcycle), BrakePark, Clutch, Gear
•
Speed Control (VelControl)
Speed Control (VelControl)
Pre.Long = VelControl Vel_km/h TolVel_m/s Sensity PremEnd
Special Meaning!
Pre.Long =
VelControl StartVel_kmh
GearNo
In case of •
first maneuver in the test run
•
duration time is set to 0.0
this maneuver has a special meaning. It defines longitudinal starting conditions. In the GUI: Entry fieled “Speed” gives vehicle starting speed, “Max. Deviation” gives the gear number.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Driving Maneuvers
35
Lateral Dynamics Maneuvers
2.3
Lateral Dynamics Maneuvers The following maneuvers are available: •
Drive the course with IPG-DRIVER
•
Sinus steering
•
Steer step
•
Simple steer control
Steering Maneuvers A smooth transition mode was added for Sinus and Steer Step. The mode can be enabled with a checkbox in the CarMaker GUI’s Maneuver dialog, under Lateral Dynamics.
Steer Step
Sinus
Steer Step
Sinus
Smooth Transition
Smooth Transition
During a simulation, mini-maneuver commands can be changed on the fly. An example application of this new feature would be to use ScriptControl (the corresponding SetMiniManCmd command is available with this release) to access the FailSafeTester with very precise timing by using the appropriate mini-maneuver commands for FST control.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Driving Maneuvers
36
Special Maneuvers
2.4
Special Maneuvers
2.4.1
The first Mini Maneuver (Duration 0 Seconds) If the first mini maneuver (number 0) has the duration 0 seconds, it has a special meaning: Instead of defining a real driving maneuver it defines the test run starting conditions. The following configuration is possible:
2.4.2
•
Speed control (VelControl): start velocity, gear number (entry field “Max. Deviation”)
•
Steer step: steering angle (entry field “Amplitude”)
The last Mini Maneuver (Duration 0 Seconds) If the last mini maneuver has the duration 0 seconds, it has a special meaning: This maneuver is called at the end of the test run even if the test run is stopped before (by user, by an error, ...).
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Driving Maneuvers
37
User Accessible Quantities
2.5
User Accessible Quantities Please refer to section 12.1.1 ’User Accessible Quantities: Driving Maneuvers’.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Vehicle Body
38
Overview
Chapter 3
Vehicle Body
3.1
Overview The simulated vehicle is a multi body system which is characterized through different bodies. They are generated and optimized with MESA VERDE. Description of the bodies: Body
Parts of the body
vehicle’s body
All sprung masses beside engine, trimloads and vehicle loads.
engine
Engine as a separate mass (easily changeable motorization).
trimloads
Constant loads to be added up to vehicle’s curb load.
vehicle loads
Additional loads to define a certain load case, e.g. measuring equipment, luggage... (changeable from GUI).
wheel suspension - front left - front right - rear left - rear right
All unsprung masses without the wheel, like link, wheel carrier, suspension leg, wishbone mount...
wheel - front left - front right - rear left - rear right
All rotating masses, like tire, rim, bearing, brake drum/disc...
External and internal forces/torques and constraints are determined by: •
Suspension Force Elements
•
Aerodynamics
•
Kinematics and Compliance
•
Tire forces/torques
•
User defined virtual forces and torques
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Vehicle Body
39
Overview
Additionally the vehicle model supports the feature to calculate body fixed sensors for acceleration, velocity, rotational acceleration and rotational velocity.
3.1.1
Configuration of the vehicle model To obtain the typical behavior of a certain type of vehicle the multi body system is extensively parameterizable. The parameters are selected in a way that all type of vehicles, from a small compact car up to a big SUV can be simulated by only changing the set of parameters. There is no need to change the structure of the multi body system (the underlying equations).
3.1.2
Finding the equilibrium state By pressing the start button and after initialization the vehicle starts at steady state. This is called the start-off configuration. This means the vehicle is in equilibrium state respecting all internal and external forces/torques (no acceleration, but nonzero velocities, in general). Parameters for the vehicle configuration are given in design configuration. The expression design configuration does not only refer to geometric quantities, but includes all other design parameters (masses, spring-stiffnesses, ...) as specified by the car-manufacturer. A design configuration usually is not a configuration of static equilibrium!
Procedure
Design Configuration
mq-equilibrium multiple steps mq-equilibrium Static equilibrium Aerodynamics, VehicleLoads, TrimLoads
mq-equilibrium Steady state Start-off configuration
Figure 3.1: Finding steady state for the vehicle model
For computation coordinates q and parameters p are distinguished. Parameters are time invariant, coordinates are not. Parameters need not be geometrical, but also include masses, stiffnesses, etc. The design configuration has the coordinates and parameters ( q d, p d ) . To find the steady state position of the vehicle a procedure called Modify-q-equilibrium (mq-equilibrium) is used. Mq-equilibrium modifies some of the coordinates q such that: •
Parameters p obtain prescribed values.
•
The configuration is an equilibrium configuration.However, at this stage no additional charges (trimloads, vehicle loads) are added to the system.
( q d, p d )
CarMaker Reference Manual
p = p0 ⇒ ( q e, p e ) modify q
(EQ 1)
Version 2.1.6
Vehicle Body
40
Overview
The start-off configuration is a configuration that matches the initial conditions of a particular test-run. It differs from a nominal configuration (static equilibrium) by taking into account: •
Trim-loads, vehicle loads
•
Start-off (or initial) driving velocity.
•
Aerodynamics.
The start-off configuration is obtained from the nominal configuration by modifying q , keeping p fixed:
( q e, p e )
3.1.3
keep p const ( q s, p s ) . ⇒ modify q
(EQ 2)
Vehicle Interface The vehicle body is the central model. It consists of the Mesa Verde multibody vehicle model along with predefined interfaces to other modules. The vehicle body interface is defined in Vehicle.h. Alternative vehicle models have to fill this interface with life.
3.1.4
Interaction with other modules The vehicle body module interferes with other modules from the vehicle library.
Brake System
Powertrain
Vehicle Body
Trailer
Steer System Tire
Interface Figure 3.2: Modules interfering with the vehicle body
Each module has an interface to the vehicle body module. By this interfaces parameters and coordinates of the vehicle body are modified.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Vehicle Body
41
General Parameters
3.2
General Parameters RefPointInputSystem =
x
y
z
This parameter specifies the origin of the Fr1 (in FrD coordinates). The coordinates XYZ point from the origin of FrD to the origin of Fr1. (see section 1.2 ’CarMaker Axis Systems’). Example
RefPointInputSystem =
-2.0 0.0 0.0
This means that the origin of Fr1 is 2 m behind (in vehicles longitudinal direction) FrD.
Hitch.pos =
x
y
z
Hitch (trailer coupling device) position at the vehicle expressed in FrD coordinates. Example
Hitch.pos = 0.0 0.0 0.3
Virtual.PoA =
x
y
z
The virtual force/torque attacks the vehicle body in Virtual.PoA. Virtual.PoA is decomposed in FrD. Default position is the center of mass of vehicle body (see page 43).
Virtual.PoA_1 =
x
y
z
Point of attack of the virtual force/torque. Virtual.PoA_1 is decomposed in Fr1. Virtual.PoA_1 overwrites Virtual.PoA.
Picture.PicFName =
FName
File name of the Tcl/Tk Picture you see in the main HIL application. The file is searched in the Data/Pic folder. Unimportant for simulation results. Example
Picture.PicFName = VW_NewBeetle.tcl
Movie.Skin.FName = Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
FName
Picture.PicFName = VW_NewBeetle.obj
Version 2.1.6
Vehicle Body
42
General Parameters
Vehicle.OuterSkin =
rll.x
rll.y
rll.z
fur.x fur.y fur.z
Vehicles outer skin box, defined by the points rear lower left (rll) and front upper right (fur). Example
Vehicle.OuterSkin =-0.1 0.85 0.2 4.05 -0.85 1.6
Jack.fl.pos = Jack.fr.pos = Jack.rl.pos = Jack.rr.pos =
x x x x
y y y y
z z z z
Optional. Jack positions at vehicle chassis.
SimParamFName =
FName
Optional. Name of the file containing simulation parameters. File is searched in /Data/Config. Default SimParameters or SimParameters.. The usage of the parameters ECUParamFName and SimParamFName may lead to inconsistencies with IO initialization. For experts only!
ECUParamFName =
FName
Optional. Name of the file containing parameters of Electronic Control Units (ECU) IO-Signal calibrations. File is searched in /Data/Config. Default ECUParameters or ECUParameters.. The usage of the parameters ECUParamFName and SimParamFName may lead to inconsistencies with IO initialization. For experts only!
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Vehicle Body
43
Mass Geometry
3.3
Mass Geometry
3.3.1
Overview The representation of the distribution of mass in a material system is called mass geometry. Inertia properties are associated with the vehicle-body, each of the four wheel carriers and each wheels. Additional body loads are modeled via additional masses and inertias as well. Three parameters have to be specified to define a mass element: •
The mass value of the body to define.
•
The center of mass (CoM) of each body is defined. The center of mass is a geometrical point. The three scalar quantities are the position vector of CoM decomposed relative to the origin of the definition frame.
•
The inertia tensor (= second moments of mass = moments of inertia) is a symmetric second-order tensor, which is specified by six scalar quantities I = A B C D E F (Frequently the off-diagonal elements (D, E, F) of the inertia tensor are neglected):
∫
A F E F B D = E D C
2
( y + z 2 ) dm
–
symmetry
∫
xy dm
–
∫
2
( z + x 2 ) dm
–
symmetry
xz dm
∫
yz dm
(EQ 3)
Body
Body
symmetry
∫
Body
Body
Body
∫
2
( x + y 2 ) dm
Body
3.3.2 Parameters
Parameters The following parameters are required for this model:
Body.pos Body.mass Body.I The vehicle body without engine. Its center of mass is placed in the design frame at Body.Pos. The vehicle body has the mass Body.mass and the inertia tensor Body.I. The elements of the inertia tensor are given in the order A B C D E F. It is sufficient to give the elements A B C (main diagonal elements) only. A vehicle body with inertia A=360 kg*m2, B=800 kg*m2, C=1800 kg*m2: Body.mass = Body.Pos = Body.I =
375.0 1.5 0.0 0.45 360 800 1800
Engine.pos Engine.mass Engine.I The engine body. The engine is fixed on the Body of the vehicle. For details, see vehicle body.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Vehicle Body
44
Mass Geometry
WheelCarrier.fl.pos WheelCarrier.fl.mass WheelCarrier.fl.I Wheel carrier front left. Represents all unsprung mass in the suspension (except the wheel).
WheelCarrier.fr.pos WheelCarrier.fr.mass WheelCarrier.fl.r Wheel carrier front right. For details, see wheel carrier front left.
WheelCarrier.rl.pos WheelCarrier.rl.mass WheelCarrier.rl.I Wheel carrier rear left. For details, see wheel carrier front left.
WheelCarrier.rr.pos WheelCarrier.rr.mass WheelCarrier.rr.I Wheel carrier rear right. For details, see wheel carrier front left.
Wheel.fl.pos Wheel.fl.mass Wheel.fl.I Wheel front left. The wheel and all other rotating components (parts of the brake, ...) .
Wheel.fr.pos Wheel.fr.mass Wheel.fl.r Wheel front right. For details, see wheel front left.
Wheel.rl.pos Wheel.rl.mass Wheel.rl.I Wheel rear left. For details, see wheel front left.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Vehicle Body
45
User Accessible Quantities for Vehicle Body
Wheel.rr.pos Wheel.rr.mass Wheel.rr.I Wheel rear right. For details, see wheel front left.
TrimLoad..pos TrimLoad..mass TrimLoad..I Bodies to trim mass contribution to that of a reference vehicle. Trim loads are fixed to vehicle body. := 0, 1, 2, ... Do not confuse TrimLoads with test run specific additional charges you may want to put on your vehicle.
3.4
User Accessible Quantities for Vehicle Body Please refer to section 12.2 ’User Accessible Quantities for Vehicle Body’.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Force Elements
46
Chapter 4
Suspension Force Elements
The contribution of each suspension force element results in the wheel contact force. Four types of force elements are modeled: •
the suspension spring (Spring),
•
the suspension damper (DampPull, DampPush),
•
the suspension buffer (BufPull, BufPush) and
•
the stabilizer or anti-roll bar or stabilizer bar (Stabi).
spring damper buffer push wheel center stabilizer compression tz z x y
buffer pull
Figure 4.1: Force elements shown at left wheel
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Force Elements
47
External Suspension Forces
4.1
External Suspension Forces External suspension forces are added to the forces generated by the CarMaker build in models for spring/bumpers, damper and stabilizer: F SpringTot = F Spring + F SpringExt
(EQ 4)
F DampTot = F Damp + F DampExt F StabiTot = F Stabi + F StabiExt There is multiple usage for external suspension forces (according to (EQ 4)): •
Replace suspension forces by external forces. This is used when a custom suspension model (e. g. simulink model) should replace the CarMaker built in model for some or all suspension forces. The original forces have to be set to zero by the “amplify” parameters (.XXX.Amplify = 0).
•
Add forces to forces calculated by the built in model. This can be used to simulate forces from a active suspension device which are superpositioned to the conventional forces.
ExtSuspFrcs.FName = FileName or ExtSuspFrcs.Kind = ModelKind The model is selected by the Kind entry ModelKind. Instead of using the Kind key, an external parameter set can be referenced by its filename FileName. FileName is the path relative to the miscellaneous directory.
General Remarks •
Suspension models has to be registered by CarMakers model management mechanism. Each model needs -
a unique kind key to reference exactly this model from the pool of suspension models.
-
interface functions to initialize, calculate and delete a model instance
•
All parameters other than (*.FName and *.Kind) are model specific. Their keys has to start with the prefix "ExtSuspFrcs."
•
Known from earlier CarMaker version (before 2.1) the amplify parameters *.Spring_ext.Amplify, *.Damp_ext.Amplify, *.Stabi_ext.Amplify doesn’t exist any longer. If they are needed they have to be implemented in the suspension model itselfe.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Force Elements
48
Springs
4.2
Springs This module simulates a conventional spring suspension. It calculates the spring component force F Spring . As shown in Figure 4.3 there is a relation between the deflection of the wheel and the spring. There is a translation between the forces F z and F Spring and between the travel of the wheel t z and the spring x∗ .
FS
pri
ng
x
tz
FZ
x0 x*
Figure 4.3: Calculation of spring forces
When the suspension gets compressed the spring length x is decreasing and the resulting spring force is increasing. To accommodate this the following calculation is applied: *
F Spring = amp ⋅ f ( x ) *
x = –( x – x0 )
.
(EQ 5)
The factor amp in (EQ 5) can be used to modify the the spring forces by a given factor. Usually this is for test purposes only and the factor should remain set to one. The quantity x 0 is called relaxed (or unstretched) length of the spring. The resultant spring force depends on the difference between the relaxed length x 0 and the actual length x . The actual length is the current distance between lower and upper attachment point of the spring.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Force Elements
49
Springs
According to (EQ 5) the calculation of x∗ needs the actual spring length x . It is obtained from the suspension kinematics module according to Figure 4.4. q represents the generalized coordinates of the suspension.
q
suspension kinematics module
F q, Spring
spring component
x
f (q) ∂x ----∂q
F Spring
F = f ( x∗ )
Figure 4.4: Transformation of spring deflections and forces
If no spring length is parametrized, minus wheel compression tz is used.
Parameters SuspF means front axle, SuspR means rear axle
*.Spring.Amplify = Factor Spring amplification factor Factor.
*Spring.l0 = UnstrechedLength Unstretched (i.e. force free) length UnstrechedLength of the spring.
*.Spring:
DataTable *
This characteristic translates compression ( x from (EQ 5)) to spring force.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Force Elements
50
Dampers
4.3
Dampers This module simulates a suspension damper. It calculates the force F Damp . The suspension dampers force F Damp depends on the velocity x˙ . Different characteristics are taken into account by defining different functions for “pull” ( x˙ > 0 ) and “push” ( x˙ ≤ 0 ).
FD
am p
x
tz
FZ
x˙
Figure 4.5: Calculation of damper forces
A increasing length x of the damper leads to a positive velocity x˙ . F Damp ( x˙ ) = amp ⋅ F DampPull ( x˙ )
x˙ > 0
F Damp ( x˙ ) = amp ⋅ F DampPush ( x˙ )
x˙ ≤ 0
.
(EQ 6)
The amp factor in (EQ 6) can be used to to modify the results of the calculation by a given factor. Usually this is for test purposes only and the factor should remain set to one. The dampers pull/push characteristics are defined seperately. Pull is when the damper is getting longer, push is when the damper is getting shorter.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Force Elements
51
Dampers
The velocity x˙ is calculated by differentiation of the damper length x . It is obtained from the suspension kinematics module according to Figure 4.6. q represents the generalized coordinates of the suspension. suspension kinematics module
q
f (q)
F q, Damp
∂x ----∂q
damper component
x˙
push or pull?
F = f ( x˙ )
F Damp
Figure 4.6: Transformation of damper deflections and forces
If no damper length is parametrized, minus wheel compression tz is used.
All characteristics have to be defined in first quadrant. CarMaker takes care of the correct signs.
F definition in 1st quadrant
x˙ Figure 4.7: Definition of damper push and pull characteristics
Parameters
*.Damp_Push.Amplify = Factor Damper push force amplification factor Factor (see (EQ 6)).
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Force Elements
52
Dampers
*.Damp_Push:
DataTable
This characteristic translates compression velocitiy x˙ to damper push force. It has to be defined in first quadrant (positive velocities, positive forces). F Damp ( 0 ) = 0 should be obeyed. The table has two columns, velocity in m/s in the first, the damper forces in N the second. Example
SuspF.Damp_Push: 0 0 0.05 90 0.13 140 0.26 250 0.39 330 0.52 410 1.04 790
*.Damp_Push.Amplify = Factor Damper push force amplification factor Factor (see (EQ 6)).
*.Damp_Push:
DataTable
This characteristic translates extention velocitiy x˙ to damper pull force. It has to be defined in first quadrant (positive velocities, positive forces). F Damp ( 0 ) = 0 should be obeyed. The table has two columns, velocity in m/s in the first, the damper forces in N the second.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Force Elements
53
Buffers / Bumpers
4.4
Buffers / Bumpers This module simulates suspension push/pull buffers. F BufPull is the force of the lower bumpstop, F BufPush is the force of the upper bump-stop.
tz x 0Push
FBufPush
t z0Push
buffer push
x 0Pull
t z0Pull FBufPull
buffer pull
Figure 4.8: Buffer elements shown at left wheel
The suspension buffers forces F BufPull , F BufPush depend on the buffer compression x : F BufPush = amp ⋅ f ( x∗ )
*
x = x 0, Push – x
F BufPull = 0
(EQ 7)
*
x <0
F BufPush = 0 F BufPull = amp ⋅ ( – f ) ( x∗ )
*
x >0
*
x = x – x 0, Pull *
x <0
*
x >0
.
(EQ 8)
x 0, Push , x 0, Pull are the relaxed (or unstretched) length of the upper/lower bump-stop. For the calculation of the buffer forces according to (EQ 7) and (EQ 8) the actual buffer compression x is needed. It is obtained from the suspension kinematics module according to Figure 4.9. q represents the generalized coordinates of the suspension.
q
F q, Buf
suspension kinematics module
f (q) ∂x ----∂q
buffer component
x
F Buf
push or pull?
F = f ( x∗ )
Figure 4.9: Transformation of buffers deflections and forces
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Force Elements
54
Buffers / Bumpers
If no buffer length is parametrized, minus wheel compression tz is used.
The following figure illustrates the calculation of the buffer compression from the non-linear kinematics file:
tz
max ( t z )
values not important for calculation of buffers
x 0, Pull
t z0, Push push buffer compression
p u l l b u f fe r compression
x 0, Push
max ( x Push )
max ( x Pull )
Push buffer active
x
t z0, Pull min ( t z )
Pull buffer active
Figure 4.10: Calculating the buffer length out of kinematic data
The two paramters t z0, Push and t z0, Pull have correspponding buffer compression zero offset values x 0, Push and x 0, Pull .The absolut values are unimportant since there is always the difference calculated from the current compression value to its zero offset. Of importance is that the gradient of the compression curve is always negative, so that according to (EQ 7) and (EQ 8) a positive buffer compression is calculated. Values given between x 0, Push and x 0, Pull are ignored from CarMaker and therefore are not important. The amp factor in (EQ 7) and (EQ 8) can be used to to modify the results of the calculation function by a given factor. Usually this is for test purposes only and the factor should remain set to one. The buffers pull/push characteristics are defined seperately.
Parameters SuspF means front axle, SuspR means rear axle
SuspF.Buf_Push.Amplify SuspR.Buf_Push.Amplify Push Buffer amplification factor. Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
SuspF.Buf_Push.Amplify = 1.0
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Force Elements
55
Buffers / Bumpers
SuspF.Buf_Push.tz0 SuspR.Buf_Push.tz0
Syntax Susp.Buf_Push.tz0 = val
Unit: m
Push buffer position (defines ride clearance). According to (EQ 7) and Figure 4.8 the push buffer only acts for vertical displacements tz (of wheel carrier) greater than tz0(=x0Push). Example
SuspF.Buf_Push.tz0 = 0.055 SuspR.Buf_Push.tz0 = 0.055
SuspF.Buf_Push SuspR.Buf_Push This characteristic translates buffer compression x to buffer push force. It has to be to be defined in first quadrant. Syntax
Infofile table mapping with 2 columns
Example
SuspF.Buf_Pushl: 0.002 0.004 0.006 0.008 0.010 0.012 0.015
32.0 88.0 167.0 269.0 393.0 596.0 1085.0
SuspF.Buf_Pull.Amplify SuspR.Buf_Pull.Amplify Pull buffer amplification factor. Example
SuspF.Buf_Pull.Amplify = 1.0
SuspF.Buf_Pull.tz0 SuspR.Buf_Pull.tz0 Pull buffer mount position (defines rebound clearance). According to (EQ 8) and Figure 4.10 the pull buffer only acts for vertical displacements tz (of wheel carrier) smaller than tz0(=x0Pull). Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
SuspF.Buf_Pull.tz0 = -0.09
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Force Elements
56
Buffers / Bumpers
SuspF.Buf_Pull SuspR.Buf_Pull This characteristic translates buffer compression x to buffer pull force. It has to be to be defined in first quadrant.. Syntax
Infofile table mapping with 2 columns
Example
SuspF.Buf_Push: 0.002 0.004 0.006 0.008 0.010 0.012 0.015
CarMaker Reference Manual
32.0 88.0 167.0 269.0 393.0 596.0 1085.0
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Force Elements
57
Suspension Roll Stabilizer / Anti-Roll Bar
4.5
Suspension Roll Stabilizer / Anti-Roll Bar This module simulates a roll stabilizer (stabi). A force F Stabi acts if there is a difference between the right t zr and the left t zl wheel compression.
F Stabi2Susp, r
tz F Stabi, l t zl
αl F Stabi2Susp, l
xl αr
stabilizer
xr
t zr
F Stabi, r
Figure 4.11: Roll stabilizer principal
In general, according to Figure 4.11, the wheel compression ratio is not equal to the stabilizer deflection difference ( t∗ ≠ x∗ ). The stabilizer deflection difference x∗ can be defined either by a deflection length difference (EQ 9) or by a deflection angle difference (EQ 10): t∗ = t zr – t zl x∗ = x r – x l
,
(EQ 9)
t∗ = t zr – t zl x∗ = α r – α l
.
(EQ 10)
The constant c Stabi has to fit to the selected definition of x∗ . The forces F Stabi,l,r calculate to: F Stabi , l = amp ⋅ f ( x∗ ) = amp ⋅ c Stabi ⋅ x∗ F Stabi , r = – F Stabi , l
,
(EQ 11)
with the amplification factor amp. Under normal circumstances the amplification factor should be set to 1 (only for testing and scaling).
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Force Elements
58
Suspension Roll Stabilizer / Anti-Roll Bar
The forces are transformed in direction of the wheel deflection as follows: ∂x l F Stabi2Susp, l = F Stabi , l ⋅ ------∂q l ∂x r F Stabi2Susp,r = F Stabi , r ⋅ ------∂q r
.
(EQ 12)
For the calculation of the stabilizer forces according to (EQ 11) the actual stabilizer deflection difference x∗ is needed. It is obtained from the suspension kinematics module according to Figure 4.12. q represents the generalized coordinates of the suspension.
q
suspension kinematics module
x zr , x zl
f (q)
F q, Stabi, l
or
α zr, α zl
∂x ----∂q
F q, Stabi, r
stabilizer component
F Stabi, l, F Stabi, r
F = f ( x∗ )
Figure 4.12: Transformation of stabilizers deflections and forces
If no stabi length is parametrized, minus wheel compression tz is used.
Parameters SuspF means front axle, SuspR means rear axle
SuspF.Stabi.Amplify = SuspR.Stabi.Amplify =
value value
Stabilizer amplification factor Example
SuspF.Stabi.Amplify = 1.0
SuspF.Stabi. = SuspR.Stabi =
value value
Stabilizer “spring” c Stabi rate (see (EQ 11)). •
alt
∗
In literature often a reciprocal compression with x = x r = x l is used for definition of c Stabi . This definition deviates to the definition of x∗ in (EQ 9): x∗ x∗ = ------ . 2
alt
CarMaker Reference Manual
(EQ 13)
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Force Elements
59
Suspension Roll Stabilizer / Anti-Roll Bar alt
Stabilizer constants cStabi determined by this alternative definition have to be converted to the CarMaker definition of c Stabi : alt
cStabi c Stabi = -------------2 •
(EQ 14)
Depending on the definition of x∗ (length difference (EQ 9) or angle difference (EQ 10)) the unit of c Stabi changes to: x∗ defined as
unit of c Stabi
length difference (EQ 9)
N⁄m
angle difference (EQ 10)
N ⁄ rad
Example
SuspF.Stabi.c = 15000.0
In this case the unit is N ⁄ m .
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
60
Overview
Chapter 5
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
5.1
Overview Kinematics describes the spacial movements of a wheel due to compression and steer action. Two cases of kinematics are distinguished: •
Suspension kinematics (due to pure wheel compression).
•
Steering kinematics (due to pure steer actions).
In reality a superposition of those two isolated cases exists. Compliance describes the spacial movements of a wheel due to wheel forces which cause elastic deformations of the wheel suspension. Because of the complex construction of a vehicle suspension forces and torques can produce movements of the wheel in other directions than in their effective direction. Movements are described through coordinates in a axis system. The center of this axis system is the wheel center. Coordinates for translations and rotations of this axis system are used.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
61
Overview
Primary and Secondary Coordinates of the Suspension
kinematics primary coordinates
compliance
secondary coordinates
external forces
•
Wheel compression
•
Toe angle
•
Side force
•
Steering
•
Camber angle
•
Longitudinal force
•
Spin angle
•
Aligning torque
•
Wheel track
•
Camber torque
•
Wheel base
•
Spin torque
•
Wheel compression
Figure 5.1: Kinematics and Compliance
Figure 5.1 shows the context of kinematics and compliance. Wheel compression and steer actions are called primary coordinates of a wheel. A change in the primary coordinates has an effect on the secondary coordinates. Kinematics is defined as force free movements of the wheel suspension and is measured as a function of the primary coordinates. Contrary to the kinematics the compliance investigates in change of secondary coordinates as a result of external forces act upon the wheel. External forces (and torques) can arise from the wheel contact point the brakes and the power transmission. They are transferred to the wheel carrier. These forces yield to changes of the secondary coordinates of the wheel because of elasticities of the suspension. To describe the position of the wheel usually terms from the vehicle dynamics vernacular are used (like in the middle section of Figure 5.1). For parametrization of wheel suspensions CarMaker uses more general, simulation technical terms. The spacial movements of a wheel carrier in CarMaker is equal to the movements of the wheel carrier axis system Fr2 (see section 2.2 ’CarMaker Axis Systems’). The following figures explain the relations of the different viewpoints and their conversions:
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
62
Overview
Toe Angle / Rotation r z : positive toe angle
+
+ –rz
+r z driving direction
+
x rz
y left wheel
right wheel
top view
Figure 5.2: Definition of the tow angle and rotation r z
A positive toe angle at the right wheel carrier equals a positive rotation r z of the Fr2 axis system. Camber Angle / Rotation r x : negative camber angle
-
-
rear view
+r x
–rx
+
z rx
y left wheel
right wheel
Figure 5.3: Definition of camber angle and rotation r x
A positive camber angle at the right wheel carrier equals a positive rotation r x of the Fr2 axis system.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
63
Overview
Spin Angle / Rotation r y : positive spin angle
+
+r y
z ry
x
driving direction Figure 5.4: Definition of spin angle rotation r y
A positive spin angle equals a positive rotation r y of the Fr2 axis system. Translation t y :
z
+ y +t y left wheel
ty
–ty right wheel
Figure 5.5: Definition of wheel track and translation t y :
The translations t y of left and right wheel are parametrized independently. The change of wheel track is a result of both, the change of the left and the right wheel.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
64
Overview
Translation t x :
driving direction
z
+ x
wheel base
tx
–tx
+t x front wheel
back wheel
Figure 5.6: Definition of wheel base and translation t x
The translations t x of front and back wheel are parametrized independently. The change of wheel base is a result of both, the change of the front and the back wheel. Wheel compression / Translation t z :
z
+ positive compression
tz
y negative compression
Figure 5.7: Definition of wheel compression and translation t z
Positive wheel compression is defined in upward direction. Usually translation t z = 0 equals the wheel position in vehicles design configuration.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
65
Overview
5.1.1
Describing Kinematics with Generalized Coordinates CarMaker uses generalized coordinates to describe kinematic movements. Basically generalized coordinates q i are independent coordinates to describe a system with i degrees of freedom. i = 6N – k N k
(EQ 15)
number of bodies number of holonomic constraints
Requirements for generalized coordinates are: •
All states of a system can be described with one set of generalized coordinates respecting all holonomic constraints.
•
No holonomic constraints exist for generalized coordinates.
The last statement especially means that one coordinate can have any value without affecting the value of another coordinate.
Applied to the kinematics e. g. of a front axle this means that usually two generalized coordinates exist to describe the kinematic movements of this axle. This is already implied in Figure 5.1 as: •
A generalized coordinate q 0 to describe the degree of freedom for wheel compression.
•
A generalized coordinate q 1 to describe the degree of freedom for the steer influence.
CarMaker gives no restrictions for the choice of the generalized coordinates q 0, q 1 . In other words the user is responsible to choose generalized coordinates that fulfil the requirements mentioned above.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
66
Overview
Conceptual Overview of Kinematics Calculation This section describes the internal procedure how CarMaker calculates kinematic movements with the user defined kinematic characteristics.
q 0, q˙ 0
q 1, q˙ 1
parameters for suspension kinematics determine values from given kinematics characteristics for q 0, q 1 transl.: p = x, y, z rot. angles: ϕ 1, ϕ 2, ϕ 3 comp. length: x Spring, x Damp, x Buf, x Stabi
joint definition (“Free ZXY”) transform rotation angles ϕ 1, ϕ 2, ϕ 3 to transformation matrix A with specified rotation sequence.
assignation of position / orientation and free direction of motion ∂A ∂p r i = ------t i = ------∂q i ∂q i
calculation of generalized forces ∂x Buf ∂x Stabi ∂x Damp ∂x Spring Q i = t i F Ext + r i T Ext + F Spring ---------------- + F Damp ---------------- + F Buif ------------ + F Stabi -------------∂q i ∂q i ∂q i ∂q i
Solver M ⋅ q˙˙i = Q i + Q i∗ ( q i, q˙ i )
q 0, q˙ 0
q 1, q˙ 1
Figure 5.8: Kinematics calculation
The first box in Figure 5.8 shows the quantities acquired from the user defined characteristics for the given generalized coordinates q 0, q 1 . The vector p represents the three translation offsets and the rotation angles ϕ 1, ϕ 2, ϕ 3 specify three cardan angles. Additionally the component lengths of spring, damper, buffers and stabilizer are acquired. With the second step the cardan angles ϕ 1, ϕ 2, ϕ 3 are transformed by the joint definition to the transformation matrix A . A specific rotation sequence (e. g. ‘ZXY’) is provoked by the joint definition. For calculation of the generalized forces the free directions of motion in directions of q 0, q 1 are needed. This is done with the third step by partial differentiation of p and A . In the fourth step for each generalized coordinate a generalized force is computed. External forces and torques are respected in direction of the free direction of motion t i and r i for each coordinate. External forces and torques result from tires, brakes, gravity, etc. Also the internal forces of spring, damper, buffers and stabilizers are respected pro rata in the direction of the generalized coordinate.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
67
Overview
As a final step the solver computes and integrates the generalized accelerations q˙˙0, q˙˙1 . Beside the generalized forces Q i pseudo forces Q i∗ resulting from coriolis forces are taken into account. These pseudo forces Q i∗ depend form q i, q˙ i instead from q˙˙i .
Choosing Generalized Coordinates After dealing with the basics of kinematics definitions in CarMaker this section tries to give practical hints about how to choose appropriate generalized coordinates. Front Axle
For a front axle a generalized coordinate q 0 is needed to describe the degree of freedom for wheel compression and a generalized coordinate q 1 is needed to describe the degree of freedom for the steer influence. A good recommendation is: Generalized Coordinate
Description
q0
Wheel compression t z, 0 for steer angle zero (driving direction straight forward usually equals to q 1 = 0 ).
q1
The rack displacement.
The reason why q 0 is chosen as t z, 0 for steer angle zero is based on the fact that the steer influence changes the compression of the two controlled wheels. This effect is called selfalignment due to lift of the suspension subframe. Such a definition for q 0 is necessary because of the self-alignment the wheel compression t z depends from both coordinates q 0 and q 1 . With the definition above the requirements for generalized coordinates are fulfilled. Both coordinates are independent. Rear Axle
Two cases are distinguished for a rear axle: •
Dependent rear axle: The orientation of one wheel also depends on the compression of the other wheel (e. g. twist-beam rear axle). Good choice:
Generalized Coordinate
Description
q0
Wheel compression t z .
q1
Wheel compression t∗ z of the opposite wheel.
•
Independent rear axle: The orientation of one wheel only depends on the compression of this wheel. (e. g. independent rear suspension). Good choice:
Generalized Coordinate
Description
q0
Wheel compression t z .
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
68
Overview
5.1.2
Brief Introduction to the Measurement Procedure of K&C parameters In practice often K&C test rigs or likewise simulations are used to measure the required K&C parameters. This chapter gives a brief introduction how to measure a vehicle to obtain data that suits to the CarMaker K&C data files. The following table shows terms and abbreviations used to describe the measurement procedure. Name
Definition
Reference System
As reference system a axis system similar to the CarMaker Fr0 axis system is used (See section 1.2). The Vehicle is symmetrically aligned, nose pointing to increasing values of the X-axis.
Static Equilibrium Means equilibrium position of the (empty) vehicle on even Configuration (SEC) ground. The body is not fixed relative to the reference frame. The suspension travel must be symmetrical (left/right). The SEC compression can be measured. Wheel Travel
Translation of wheel center in Z-direction.
Compression Travel
Travel from SEC to max. compression (wheel carrier near to body) = up to metal-to metal position, in general
Rebound Travel
Travel from SEC to max. decompression (wheel carrier far away from body)
Wheel Load (Fz)
Vertical force acting from environment onto wheel carrier, positive if directed upwards. Forces are applied (point of attack) to the wheel center or the tyre/road contact point (=tire patch). The point of attack must be documented.
SWA
Steering wheel angle
Deflection Procedure (DP)
The expression deflection procedure is used synonymously for the following test sequence:
Wheel Replacement System
CarMaker Reference Manual
•
Start from SEC.
•
Slowly increase Fz (= compress suspension) up to wheel load max. value (e.g. 10000 N) = compression travel.
•
Slowly decrease Fz (=decompress suspension, rebound) up to wheel load min value (e.g. 100 N) = rebound travel.
•
Go back to SEC.
•
Compression and rebound speed should be slow and identical in both direction (thereby eliminating velocity depended effects)
•
Front axle: Keep steering rack fixed (eliminate them, if possible effects coming from steering compliance, steering backlash, ...).
•
No horizontal (Fx, Fy) force (ground to tyre) is transmitted.
•
No torque (Mx, My, Mz) (ground to tyre) is transmitted.
•
Wheels are rigidly fixed to wheel carrier (braking conditions).
Set of artificial wheels replacing real wheels during measurements. Advantage: Higher forces (Fy, Fz) during elastokinematic measurements (no slip). More exact, in general Measurements are therefore preferably done with wheel replacement system
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
69
Overview
The following lists describes two procedures to be accomplished to acquire the required data for the CarMaker K&C characteristics: Kinematics measurement procedure
Elastokinematics measurement procedure (front & rear)
•
Find static equilibrium configuration (SEC)
•
Determine absolute kinematic quantities (i.e. relative to Fr0) in SEC.
•
Rigidly fix vehicle body in SEC relative to Fr0. Vehicle body remains clamped and restrained during K&C measurements.
•
For Front axles: -
Do DP (left & right symmetrical) keeping steering rack fixed, SWA = 0 (straightforward driving)
-
Do DP (left & right asymmetrical), 50mm compression and rebound are sufficient, SWA = 0 (straightforward driving)
-
Do DP (left & right symmetrical) while changing SWA = min value, -200, -100, -60, 40, -20, -10, 0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 100, 200, max value [deg]. In order to increase the model quality: A finer SWA-graduation is possible/useful.
-
Determine steering reduction ratio: Fix (relative to Fr0) Wheel Carrier in SEC. Starting from min value, increase SWA in steps of 5[deg] (around zero position) and 10 [deg] (for steering wheel angles > 30[deg]) up to max. value (lock to lock steering). Measure kinematic quantities.
•
For independent rear axles: Do DP (left & right symmetrical)
•
For Twist-beam rear axles (dependent rear axle): -
Fix rear right wheel carrier relative to Fr0 in SEC, do DP with rear-left wheel carrier
-
Increase (up to max. compression) in steps of 5-25mm rear right wheel carrier and fix it (relative to Fr0), do DP with rear left wheel carrier
-
Decrease (up to max rebound) in steps of 5-25 mm rear right wheel carrier and fix it (relative to Fr0), do DP with rear left wheel carrier
•
Fix vehicle body in SEC.
•
Block wheels (wheel carrier rigidly fixed to wheel)
•
Longitudinal compliance (longitudinal acceleration and Braking compliance)
•
•
-
Apply horizontal forces Fx = -6000N, - 5000N, -4000N, ... , 0N, 1000 N, .... , 6000 N at front left and rear left wheel
-
Measure kinematic quantities
-
Forces are applied at wheel center or at ground-tyre contact point. The specific case must be documented
Lateral compliance: -
Apply horizontal forces Fy = -6000N, - 5000N, -4000N, ... , 0N, 1000 N, .... , 6000 N at front left and rear left wheel
-
Measure kinematic quantities
-
Forces are applied at wheel center or at ground/tyre contact point. The specific case must be documented
Aligning torque compliance -
Apply vertical torque Mz = -200 Nm, -100 Nm, 0Nm, 100 Nm, 200 Nm at front left and rear left wheel
-
Measure kinematic quantities
-
Torque is applied at wheel center or at ground/tyre contact point. The specific case must be documented
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
70
Kinematics and Compliance
5.2
Kinematics and Compliance The suspension is connected to the vehicle body by a translational and rotational kinematic joint (rotation sequence: Z–X–Y ).
∑
∑
t = K in ( q 0, q 1 ) + Com ( q 0, q 1, F, … ) r i j
(EQ 16)
The suspension kinematics and compliance can be defined by a number of models or parameter sets, which are calculated in the order of there definition. An additional outward shift of the wheel can be defined in the tire parameter set, see section 10.2 ’General Tire Parameters’. Parameters
The following parameters are required for suspension kinematics and suspension compliance: All model parameters have a prefix, depending on the corresponding suspension and the number of the model definition. The prefix can be an empty string or a string, ending with a dot ("SuspF.", "SuspF.Kin.3." for kinematics, "SuspR.Com.2." for compliance).
SuspKey.KnC.N =
N
The kinematics or compliance definition consists of N superimposed models, see (EQ 16). The suspension is selected by SuspKey which can be SuspF or SuspR. The string KnC is Kin for kinematics or Com for compliance. It is an optional entry, the default is 1.
SuspKey.KnC.i.FName = SuspKey.KnC.i.Kind =
FileName or ModelKind
The i-th model is selected by the Kind entry ModelKind. Instead of using the Kind key, an external parameter set can be referenced by filename FileName. The reference to an external parmeter set is supported only on toplevel and in case of only one model at toplevel, not in a parameter set referenced iself. FileName is the path relative to the suspension kinematics directory.
SuspKey.KnC.i.ValidSide =
ValidSide
The i-th model is valid for ValidSide. If suspension side and ValidSide doesn’t match, this model is skipped for this suspension side. ValidSide is exactly one of left, left+right and right. It’s an optional entry, the default is left+right.
SuspKey.KnC.i.InputSide =
InputSide
The i-th model is defined by parameters for the suspension on side ValidSide.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
71
Kinematics and Compliance
The model parameters for the actual suspension side has to be deduced from the input parameters for side InputSide. InputSide is exactly one of left, left+right and right. It is an optional entry, the default is left.
SuspKey.KnC.i.L.param = SuspKey.KnC.i.R.param =
... ...
Parameters for the left suspension starts with “L.”, for the right with “R.”.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
72
Kinematics Models
5.3
Kinematics Models All model parameters have a prefix, depending on the corresponding suspension and the number of the model definition. The prefix can be an empty string or a string, ending with a dot ("SuspF.", "SuspF.Kin.3." for kinematics, "SuspR.Com.2." for compliance).
5.3.1 Description
“Linear” and “Linear2D” Linear kinematics uses linear equations to describe the kinematic movements for translations and rotations of the wheel (-carrier). Depending on the number of generalized coordinates the model ‘Linear’ is used for one or the model ‘Linear2D’ is used for two generalized coordinates.
a
dk 1 dq 1 c Off
dk c 1 = -------1dq 1
q 0, q 1 dk 0 dq 0
dk c 0 = -------0dq 0
Figure 5.9: Kinematics ‘linear2D’ for coordinates q 0, q 1
This means (steered) front axles use the model ‘Linear2D’ because they have two degrees of freedom which influence the kinematics of the wheel carrier. Independent rear suspensions use the model ’Linear’ because the kinematics only depends on the wheel compression of the considered wheel carrier. For instance, for a twist beam rear axle, where kinematics also depends on the compression of the opposite wheel carrier, the model ‘Linear2D’ has to be used. A simple linear equation is used for each coordinate. a ( q 0 ) = c Off + c 0 ⋅ q 0
(EQ 17)
The model ‘Linear2D’ uses a superposition of two linear equations one for each generalized coordinate. a ( q 0, q 1 ) = c Off + c 0 ⋅ q 0 + c 1 ⋅ q 1
(EQ 18)
with: a
c Off
CarMaker Reference Manual
one of 3 translations ( t x, t y, t z ) in frame Fr1 or 3 cardan rotation angles ( r x, r y, r z ) with a rotation sequence Z–X–Y or 4 component lengths ( l Spring, l Damp, l Buf, l Stabi ) offset for q 0, q 1 = 0
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
73
Kinematics Models
c0 c1
Parameters
gradient depending on compression q 0 gradient depending on compression or steering coordinate q 1
The following parameters are required for this model. The asterix “*“ is an abbreviation for the suspension, for kinematics or compliance, for the model number and the paramter side, see section 5.2 ’Kinematics and Compliance’ on page 70. All Kinematics parameters are optional. This means CarMaker will not complain about missing parameters. Due to the fact that all defaults are zero CarMaker probably will complain about a non functional vehicle.
*.tx = *.ty = *.tz =
tx0 ty0 tz0
dtx/dq0 dty/dq0 dtz/dq0
dtx/dq1 dty/dq1 dtz/dq1
Optional. Wheel (-carrier) translations. Translation is calculated by the offset and two racios dependending on the generalized coordinates of the suspensions (see (EQ 17)). Defaults: 0 0 0 and for tz 0 1 0. Units: m m/q0 m/q1.
*.rx = *.ry = *.rz =
rx0 ry0 rz0
drx/dq0 dry/dq0 drz/dq0
drx/dq1 dry/dq1 drz/dq1
Wheel (-carrier) rotations. Rotation depends on the generalized coordinates of the suspension (see (EQ 17)). Defaults: 0 0 0. Units: rad rad/q0 rad/q1.
*.lSpring = *.lDamp = *.lBuf = *.lStabi =
lSpring0 lDamp0 lBuf0 lStabi0
dlSpring/dq0 dlDamp/dq0 dlBuf/dq0 dlStabi/dq0
dlSpring/dq1 dlDamp/dq1 dlBuf/dq1 dlStabi/dq1
Deflection or length of the force elements spring, damper, buffer and roll stabilizer depending on generalized coordinates. Remark: For the roll stabilizer the units of this coordinate and the units of the roll stiffness has to fit together. Defaults: 0 -1 0. Units: m m/q0 m/q0.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
74
Kinematics Models
5.3.2 Description
“MapNL” Nonlinear 1-dimensional (1D) or 2-dimensional (2D) mapping, depending on suspension DOFs.
t = c self ( q0 ) r self
t = c self ( q0, q1 ) r self
or
(EQ 19)
High fidelity K&C uses lookup-tables to describe the spacial movements of the wheel. This implies huge amounts of data for each degree of freedom. Location and Activation
The K&C parameter files are stored under /Data/Chassis. The high fidelity K&C Parameters are activated in the vehicle file (see section 5.1 ’Overview’.
Units
All quantities, if not explicitly mentioned otherwise are SI-Units. Particularly the following quantities are used in the K&C parameter files. Table 5.1: SI Units used with CarMaker High Fidelity K&C Parameters
Table Concept
Parameters
Quantity
Name
Symbol
Time
second
s
Length
meter
m
Angle
radian (one turn = 2*π)
rad
Mass
kilogram
kg
Force
newton
N
Torque
newton meter
Nm
Stiffness
newton per meter
N/m
Rotational Stiffness
newton meter per radian
Nm/rad
The characteristics for high fidelity kinematics are stored in a specific indexed table format. Characteristics can be one or two dimensional depending on the number of generalized quantities. The vectors Arg 0 ) and vector Arg 1 ) hold the values of all sample points for the following two dimensional lookup table. Which values are given for each sample point is specified in a list. The following parameters are required for this model:
*.Arg =
NameDoF0
[ NameDoF1 ]
Define the dimension of kinematics mapping, one keyword for 1D, two names for 2D. The first name NameDoF0 can be “comp”. The second name NameDoF0 can be an empty string (for 1D), “comp” or “steer”.
*.Arg0 = *.Arg0.Fac2SI =
min ... max Fac2SI
Values of first kinematics degree of freedom (DOF). All values are multiplied with Fac2SI. Default is Fac2SI=1.0.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
75
Kinematics Models
*.Arg1 = *.Arg1.Fac2SI =
min ... max Fac2SI
Values of second kinematics degree of freedom. All values are multiplied with Fac2SI. Default is Fac2SI=1.0.
*.Data.Name =
DataNameList
List of suspension coordinates to be modified by compliance effects. The quantities are selected by the blank seperated list DataNameList of the keys tx, ty, tz, rx, ry, rz, lSpring, lDamp, lBuf, lStabi. Unknown keys are skipped and the values from the corresponding column in the data table are ignored. Typically unknown or commented out keys should start with a "%" charscter.
*.Data.Offset = *.Data.dArg0 = *.Data.dArg1 = *.Data.Fac2SI =
OffsetList dData_dArg0_List dData_dArg1_List Fac2SI_List
Each data coordinate can have an offset, one or two linear gradients depending on the number of DOFs. All values are multiplied with their factor Fac2SI from Fac2SI_List. The calculation of a suspension coordinate is done by the formula:
dData dData value = Data + Offset + ----------------- ⋅ Arg0 + ----------------- ⋅ Arg1 dArg1 dArg0
*.Data:
(EQ 20)
TableWithValues
Values for the selected coordinates from DataNameList. Ordering: Each line contains the number of values, which are defined in DataNameList. The first DOF is kept constant, the second is varied first. Example: The compression is kept constant while steering is varied. Than the same for the next compression and so on.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
76
Kinematics Models
5.3.3 Description
“SetZero” Model to suppress previous displacements for selected quantities
t = 0 r Parameters
(EQ 21)
The following parameters are required for this model:
*.Data.Name =
DataNameList
The suspension displacements by kinematics effects of the selected quantities are set to zero. The quantities are selected by the blank seperated list DataNameList of the keys tx, ty, tz, rx, ry, rz, lSpring, lDamp, lBuf, lStabi.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
77
Compliance Models
5.4
Compliance Models All model parameters have a prefix, depending on the corresponding suspension and the number of the model definition. The prefix can be an empty string or a string, ending with a dot ("SuspF.", "SuspF.Kin.3." for kinematics, "SuspR.Com.2." for compliance).
5.4.1 Description
“CoeffConstFr1” and “CoeffConstFr2” The compliance displacement is based on a linear, constant coefficients for the forces, attacking the actual and the opposite suspension. In model “CoeffConstFr1” the forces are decomposed in frame Fr1. In model “CoeffConstFr2” the forces are decomposed in frame Fr2. The model “CoeffConst” is for compatibility to CarMaker 2.0 only. It will be removed soon! The frame in which the compliance forces are decomposed depends on a global configuration parameter Car.SuspElastoKin_FrcTrqFr1 in SimParameters. The default is frame Fr2. Changes relative to CarMaker 2.0: Parameter are now component orientated. This means displacement for this suspension based on forces attacking the suspension itself, opposit or elsewhere. In CarMaker 2.0 the parameters are force orientated.
´
Parameters
t = c W ⋅ W self + c W ⋅ W opp self opp r self
(EQ 22)
The following parameters are required for this model:
*.Data.Name =
DataNameList
The suspension displacements by compliance effects of the selected quantities. The quantities are selected by the blank seperated list DataNameList of the keys tx, ty, tz, rx, ry, rz. Remark: Usually it is meaningful to leave out forces in z direction and tz movements.
*.Frc.x = *.Frc.y = *.Frc.z = *.FrcOpp.x = *.FrcOpp.y = *.FrcOpp.z =
Values Values Values Values Values Values
Compliance coefficients depending on forces (along x, y, z axis) to the actual (*.Frc.*) or the opposite (*.FrcOpp.*) suspension. Point of attack is the wheel center.
*.Frc.Fac2SI = *.Trq.Fac2SI =
Fac2SI_List Fac2SI_List
All coefficients are multiplied by the factors from Fac2SI_List, from *.Frc.Fac2SI for forces and from *.Trq.Fac2SI for torques.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
78
Compliance Models
*.Trq.x = *.Trq.y = *.Trq.z = *.TrqOpp.x = *.TrqOpp.y = *.TrqOpp.z =
Values Values Values Values Values Values
Compliance coefficients depending on torques (arround x, y, z axis) to the actual (*.Frc.*) or the opposite (*.FrcOpp.*) suspension. The torques each are reduced to the wheel center.
*.FrcDamp = *.FrcOppDamp =
Values Values
Compliance coefficients depending on the damper force to the actual (*.Frc.*) or the opposite (*.FrcOpp.*) suspension.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
79
Compliance Models
5.4.2 Description
“SetZero” Model to suppress previous displacements for selected quantities
t = 0 r self Parameters
(EQ 23)
The following parameters are required for this model:
*.Data.Names =
DataNamesList
The suspension displacements by compliance effects of the selected quantities are set to zero. The quantities are selected by the blank seperated list DataNameList of the keys tx, ty, tz, rx, ry, rz, lSpring, lDamp, lBuf, lStabi. Unknown keys are skipped and the values from the corresponding column in the data table are ignored. Typically unknown or commented out keys should start with a "%" charscter.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
80
Compliance Models
5.4.3 Description
“CoeffLin1DFr1” and “CoeffLin1DFr2” The compliance displacement is based on a linear, compression depending coefficients for the forces, attacking the actual and the opposite suspension. In model “CoeffLin1DFr1” the forces are decomposed in frame Fr1. In model “CoeffLin1DFr2” the forces are decomposed in frame Fr2.
Parameters
The following parameters are required for this model:
*.Arg0 = *.Arg0.Fac2SI =
min ... max Fac2SI
Values of first degree of freedom (DOF), suspension compression. All values are multiplied with Fac2SI. Default is Fac2SI = 1.0.
*.Data.Name = DataNameList The quantities are selected by the blank seperated list DataNameList of the keys tx, ty, tz, rx, ry, rz, lSpring, lDamp, lBuf, lStabi. Unknown keys are skipped and the values from the corresponding column in the data table are ignored. Unknown or commented out keys typically should start with a "%" charscter.
*.Frc.Fac2SI = *.Trq.Fac2SI =
Fac2SI_List Fac2SI_List
All coefficients are multiplied by the factors from Fac2SI_List, from *.Frc.Fac2SI for forces and from *.Trq.Fac2SI for torques.
*.Frc.x.Data : *.Frc.y.Data : *.Frc.z.Data : *.Trq.x.Data : *.Trq.y.Data : *.Trq.z.Data :
TableWithValues TableWithValues TableWithValues TableWithValues TableWithValues TableWithValues
Compliance coefficients for the selected coordinates from DataNameList depending on forces (along x, y, z axis) or torques (arround x, y, z axis) to the actual suspension. Point of attack is the wheel center. The table starts with values for the first element of Arg0 end ends with values for the last one.
*.FrcDamp.Data :
TableWithValues
Compliance coefficients depending on the damper force to the actual (*.Frc.*) suspension.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
81
Compliance Models
5.4.4 Description
“DisplaceLinFr1” and “DisplaceLinFr2” The compliance displacement is described by displacement maps. The displacement maps depends on the forces, attacking the actual suspension. In model “DisplaceLinFr1” the forces are decomposed in frame Fr1. In model “DisplaceLinFr2” the forces are decomposed in frame Fr2.
Parameters
The following parameters are required for this model:
*.Arg = ArgName The quantity, the displacement relationship depends on, is selected by ArgName. Known keys are Frc.x, Frc.y, Frc.z, Trq.x, Trq.y, Trq,z, FrcDamp. The forces (along x, y, z axis) or torques (arround x, y, z axis) attacks the actual suspension in the wheel center.
*.Arg0 = *.Arg0.Fac2SI =
min ... max Fac2SI
Values of the function argument. All values are multiplied with Fac2SI. Default is Fac2SI=1.0.
*.Data.Name =
DataNameList
The quantities are selected by the blank seperated list DataNameList of the keys tx, ty, tz, rx, ry, rz, lSpring, lDamp, lBuf, lStabi. Unknown keys are skipped and the values from the corresponding column in the data table are ignored. Typically unknown or commented out keys should start with a "%" character.
*.Data :
TableWithValues
displacement values for the coordinates from DataNameList. The table starts with values for the first element of Arg0 end ends with values for the last one.
*.Data.Fac2SI =
Fac2SI_List
All data columns are multiplied by the factors from Fac2SI_List.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
82
Compliance Models
Example
This parameter set is for the front axle and for the left suspension only. The compliance depends on Frc.x, given in unit "kN". It defines compliance effects for suspension coordinates ty and rz, both given in SI units. SuspF.Com.0.Kind = SuspF.Com.0.ValidSide = SuspF.Com.0.InputSide = SuspF.Com.0.L.Arg = SuspF.Com.0.L.Arg0 = SuspF.Com.0.L.Arg0.Fac2SI = SuspF.Com.0.L.Data.Name = SuspF.Com.0.L.Data.Fac2SI = SuspF.Com.0.L.Data: 0.000 0.000 0.001 0.006 0.002 0.011 0.004 0.015 0.008 0.018 0.016 0.020 0.032 0.021 0.032 0.021
CarMaker Reference Manual
"DisplaceLinFr1" left left Frc.x 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 4.5 4.6 4.7 1.0e3 ty rz 1.0 1.32456
Version 2.1.6
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
83
Compliance Models
5.4.5
Example: Compliance SuspF.Com.N = 5 #--- "basic" compliance parameters by Model 0 SuspF.Com.0.Kind = CoeffconstFr1 SuspF.Com.0.ValidSide =left+right SuspF.Com.0.InputSide =left SuspF.Com.0.L.Data.Name =tx ty tz ry SuspF.Com.0..... #--- "extended", detailed parameters by Models 1, 2, ... # parametrisation for right suspension based on parameters for # a left suspension. Left parameters are "transfered" to right. # SuspF.Com.1.Kind = DisplaceLinFr1 SuspF.Com.1.ValidSide =left+right # Model 1 is used for left and right SuspF.Com.1.InputSide =left # parameters are given only for left # right by projection left->right SuspF.Com.1.L.Arg = Frc.x SuspF.Com.1.L.....
SuspF.Com.2.Kind = SuspF.Com.2.ValidSide SuspF.Com.2.InputSide SuspF.Com.2.L.Arg = SuspF.Com.2.L.....
DisplaceLinFr1 =left =left Frc.y
SuspF.Com.3.Kind = SuspF.Com.3.ValidSide SuspF.Com.3.InputSide SuspF.Com.3.R.Arg = SuspF.Com.3.R.....
DisplaceLinFr1 =right =right Frc.y
SuspF.Com.4.Kind = SuspF.Com.4.ValidSide SuspF.Com.4.InputSide SuspF.Com.4.L.Arg = SuspF.Com.4.L..... SuspF.Com.4.R.Arg = SuspF.Com.4.R.....
DisplaceLinFr1 =left+right =left+right Trq.z
CarMaker Reference Manual
Trq.z
Version 2.1.6
Aerodynamics
84
Overview
Chapter 6
Aerodynamics
6.1
Overview CarMaker takes into account forces and torques due to external wind loads. All data is conform with the SAE norm J1594.
L
L
RM z
PM S
b/2
y
x
D
z
b
l/2 l
y S YM
VF VS
τ
x
D
V∞
Figure 6.1: CarMaker aerodynamics axis system based on SAE J1594
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Aerodynamics
85
Overview
According to this norm the SAE Road Vehicle Aerodynamics commission defined the following frame (SAE-frame): •
X: positive forward
•
Y: positive right
•
Z: positive downward
•
The origin of the SAE-frame usually in the wheel contact plane at the intersection point of the symmetry lines of track base and wheel base (in design configuration).
Aerodynamic forces and torques depend on: •
Relative wind speed between wind and vehicle ( V ∞ ).
•
Angle of attack of wind τ ( τ is given in degrees) -
τ = 0, if the wind is coming from front
-
τ > 0, if the wind is slightly coming from front left.
CarMaker incorporates wind loads as 3 forces and 3 torques on the vehicle body: ρ 2 F D = – F x = --- c D Av ∞ 2
ρ 2 F S = F y = --- c Av ∞ 2 S
ρ 2 F L = – F z = --- c Av ∞ 2 L
(EQ 24)
with drag force (positive rearward) drag coefficient (no dimension) side force (positive to right) side force coefficient (no dimension) lift force (positive upward) lift coefficient (no dimension) ambient air density vehicle reference area relative wind speed
FD cD FS cS FL cL ρ A v∞
ρ 2 M RM = M x = --- c lAv ∞ 2 RM
ρ 2 M PM = M y = --- c lAv ∞ 2 PM
ρ 2 M YM = M z = --- c lAv ∞ 2 YM
(EQ 25)
with M RM c RM M PM c PM M YM c YM l ρ A v∞
CarMaker Reference Manual
rolling moment (positive right side down) rolling coefficient (no dimension) pitching moment (positive nose up) pitching coefficient (no dimension) yawing moment (positive nose right) yawing coefficient (no dimension) wheel base used as reference length ambient air density vehicle reference area relative wind speed
Version 2.1.6
Aerodynamics
86
General Parameters
6.2
General Parameters The air density is a global parameter and not specified in this section.
AeroMarker.pos =
x
y
z
This coordinate specified in FrD axis system (see section 1.2 ’CarMaker Axis Systems’) determines the impact of external wind loads. This means when this virtual point reaches the distance of a wind machine the wind takes effect.
Aero.Kind =
KindStr
This parameter specifies the aerodynamic calculation model. Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
Aero.Kind = Coeff6x1
Version 2.1.6
Aerodynamics
87
Models
6.3
Models
6.3.1
‘Coeff6x1’
Aero.pos =
x
y
z
Specifies the position of origin of the SAE-frame expressed in the FrD axis system (see section 1.2 ’CarMaker Axis Systems’).
Aero.Ax =
Area
The vehicle reference area Area [m^2] is the projected frontal area including tires and underbody parts.
TableWithValues
Aero.Coeff :
this characteristic specifies the 3 force coefficients (EQ 24) and the 3 torque coefficients (EQ 25) depending on the angle of attack of the wind τ (given in degrees!). The tau-mapping should cover the whole field of angles, ranging from tau = -180 [deg] to tau = +180 [deg].. Syntax
Example
Table mapping with 7 columns c D cS cL
c RM
c PM
c YM
Aero.mapping: -180 -90 0 90 180
0.0 -0.2 0.0 0.2 0.0
-0.01 0.0 -0.03 0.0 -0.01
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Aero.lReference =
-0.4 0.0 0.2 0.0 -0.4
0.0 -1.7 0.0 1.7 0.0
0.1 0.9 0.1 0.9 0.1
Length
Optional reference length. The default value for cars is the wheel base, for trailers the hitch length.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Steering System
88
Overview
Chapter 7
Steering System
7.1
Overview
Vehicle (Suspension)
Steer Model
Steer Interface
Steer Interface
DrivMan
Driver
The task of a steer system is to define the driver’s “steer influence” to the (front-) suspension. The steering system has an interface that serves two parts. One part is the designated to the driving maneuver module (DrivMan simulates human interactions with the vehicle), the other part interferes to the vehicles suspension module.
Figure 7.1: Interface of the steering system
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Steering System
89
Overview
Basically steering systems for CarMaker are distinguished by the type of input (control) signals used. The control signal is the output of the driving maneuver module and is an input requirement of the steer system. Input requirement Description (Steer by...)
Angle
The steering wheel angle is used as input to the steer model. No mass dynamic effects are regarded. This means that the update to new values of steer angles happens infinitely fast (no differential equation).
Torque
Input is the steering torque from the driving maneuver module. A differential equation has to be used to calculate the steering wheel angle. Mass dynamic effects should be regarded by the model. Infinitively fast changes of steering wheel angles are not possible.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Steering System
90
Overview
Steer by Angle q L, q˙ L, ( q˙˙L )
Vehicle Suspension Left
FL mL ( qL )
Steer Model Angle
qL = qR = σH ⋅ iq → σ H ˙q L = q˙ R = σ˙ H ⋅ i q → σ H ˙˙ H ⋅ i q → σ q˙˙L = q˙˙R = σ H T H,S = i σ → q ⋅ ( F L + F R ) H
q R, q˙ R, ( q˙˙R )
FR mR ( qR )
˙˙ H σ H, σ˙ H, σ
T H,S +
Vehicle Suspension Right
7.1.1
+
Figure 7.2: Principal of Steer by Angle Models
Figure 7.2 shows the basic functionality of a steer by angle model. The steering wheel angle σ H and its derivatives are inputs to the steer model. The steering wheel angle is translated to the generalized quantity q = q L = q R . The same way for the derivatives. The translation is defined as follows:
q˙ 1 i q → σ ( σ H ) = ------------------------------- = ------H iσ → q ( σH ) σ˙ H H
(EQ 26)
(EQ 26) clarifies that the translation might depend on the steering wheel angle. Such a variable steer translation is commonly used with modern steer systems. Because there is no differential equation calculated only the static steering wheel torque T H, S is returned by the model. The inputs of the two masses are not regarded by the steer model (they have no effect on the steer system).
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Steering System
91
Overview
7.1.2
Steer by Torque q L, q˙ L, ( q˙˙L )
Steer Model Torque
q R, q˙ R, ( q˙˙R )
m ( L, H, R ) ⋅ q˙˙L = F ( L, H, R )
mL ( qL )
m ( R, H, L ) ⋅ q˙˙R = F ( R, H, L ) ˙˙ H = F ( H, L, R ) m ( H , L, R ) ⋅ σ ˙˙ H σ H, σ˙ H, σ
TH +
FR mR ( qR )
Vehicle Suspension Right
Vehicle Suspension Left
FL
+
Figure 7.3: Principal of Steer by Torque Models
A steer by torque model is characterized by the input of the steering wheel torque to the steer model and that the steer angle and velocity and acceleration is returned by the steer model. In this case differential equations as depicted in Figure 7.2 have to be calculated. If a stiff rack steering system is modeled the generalized steer coordinates reduce to one q Steer = q L = q R . Then the differential equations can be written as ( m L + m R + m H ) ⋅ q˙˙Steer = F L + F R + F H .
(EQ 27)
The acceleration of the steering wheel is determined from ˙˙ H = i q → σH ⋅ q Steer . σ
(EQ 28)
This simple approach of steer by torque model can be extended by detailed models with steering boosters or with extra functionality like active steering mechanisms.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Steering System
92
Steering System Parameters
7.2
Steering System Parameters
7.2.1
General Steering System Parameters
Steering.Kind =
KindStr
Specify the steering model to be used. The CarMaker steering model library provides the following models: Steering.Kind
Description
Classic
Standard steer by angle model.
Example
7.2.2
Steering.Kind = Classic
Steering System ’Classic’ Parameters The standard steering system of CarMaker is of the kind steer by angle (see section 7.1.1).
tie rods
Suspension Left
Suspension Right
q = qL = qR
σH
rack
+
iσ → q ( σH ) H
Figure 7.5: Steer system classic
This model simulates a simple rack steering system. The whole steering system is assumed to be stiff. The generalized coordinates on the left and the right side are equal q Steer = q L = q R . The rack position ( q Steer ) is calculated with the steering gear ratio: σH q Steer = -------------------------i σH → q ( σ H )
Steering.Rack2StWhl =
(EQ 29)
value
Steering Gear Ratio: StWhlAngle [rad] = Rack2StWhl [rad/m] * RackTranslation [m]. Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
Steering.Rack2StWhl = 100
Version 2.1.6
Steering System
93
User Accessible Quantities for Steering Systems
7.3
User Accessible Quantities for Steering Systems Please refer to section 12.4 ’User Accessible Quantities: Steering Systems’.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Steering System
94
Steering System Software Interface
7.4
Steering System Software Interface •
Models can be registered to CarMaker with an individual identification string.
•
To select and activate a model, its identification string is must to be specified in the vehicle parameter set.
Inputs to the System •
SteerByAngle/SteerByTorque
•
Steering wheel angle, angle velocity (if the model is steer by angle type)
•
Steering wheel toque (not used by steer by angle models).
•
Suspension forces to tie rod translation (left and right)
•
Suspension inertias to tie rod translation (left and right)
Outputs of the System •
General steer coordinate (tie rod translation) and derivatives (left and right)
•
Steering wheel torque required for static conditions (no accelerations).
•
Steering wheel angle, angle velocity (if the model is steer by torque type)
Interface structure to the steering calculation function typedef struct tSteerIF { tSteerBy SteerBy;/* use position or angle(in) * * as steer input /* double Ang;/* steer angle (in/out)*/ double AngVel; double AngAcc; double Trq;/* steer torque(in) * * acting on steering wheel */ double TrqStatic; /* steer torque, required for * static conditions (no acceleration)*/
(out) *
struct tSteerIFLR { /*** Input Quantities: (Car/Driver to Steering) */ doubleFrc; /* force (external to steer system) */ doubleInert; /* inertia (external to steer system) */ /*** Output Ouantities: (Steering to Car/Driver) double q, qp, qpp;/* tie rod translation
*/ */
double iSteer2q;/* ratio (out) * * steer rotation to rack translation */ } L, R; /* left, right */ } tSteerIF;
Calculation Function int (*Eval) (void *MP, tSteerIF *IF, double dt);
CarMaker Reference Manual
/* Modellparameter /* Interface structure /* time step
*/ */ */
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
95
Overview
Chapter 8
PowerTrain
8.1
Overview The powertrain which acts as a global system within the CarMaker VVE is divided into a number of subsystems with well defined interfaces. In the following the basic concept of the subsystems and interfaces is described.
8.1.1
Interface Powertrain – Vehicle This interface is responsible for the global embedding of the whole powertrain within the CarMaker VVE. As shown in Figure 8.1: the various subsystems can get input signals from ECUs or from other CarMaker modules (e. g. interaction form virtual control elements of the vehicle).
ECU Signals
ECU Signals
ECU Signals
ECU Signals
P o w e r T r a i n Engine
Clutch
Accelerator Pedal Starter activated Ignition on/off
Clutch Pedal
Gearbox
Gear Selector
D r i v M a n
T Support2Vehicle q, q˙ Wheel
T Brake2Wheel T Tire2Wheel
V e h i c l e
The interface of input/output quantities interacting with the Vehicle-Model is very compact. The powertrain is not interchanging many signals.
Figure 8.1: The Powertrain – Vehicle Interface
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
96
Overview
To observe and to drive the vehicle, additional output signals like the engine speed are needed and provided from the corresponding powertrain submodules.
8.1.2
PowerTrain Subsystems The powertrain model determines the distribution of drive torque to the wheels. The powertrain module can be combined with several subsystems. A Powertrain typically consists of the following subsystems: Model
Description
Engine
The ‘‘origin of all motion´´
Clutch
The agent between producer and consumer of driving energy
Gearbox
The converter of drive torque
There are different ways to look at powertrain submodules. One is the structural view how powertrain modules are configured and connected to a complete system. This is shown in Figure 8.2. PowerTrain
PowerTrain ‘Generic’ Model Library GenFront E
GenRear E
C GB
C GB
Gen2p2Front E
Gen2p2Rear
C GB
E
Engine
E1
C GB
Gen4WD E
C GB
Custom Model 1 E
Clutch
E2
C1
Custom
Custom
Custom
Engine 2
Clutch 2
E
C GB
Gearbox
C2
Engine 1
C GB
Custom Model 2
PowerTrain Components Library
Custom
GB1 Custom
Gearbox 1 Gearbox 2
Figure 8.2: PowerTrain structural view
The topmost layer is the selected powertrain model. Here a specific powertrain model is selected which is the central computation unit for the whole powertrain. This means the binding of all components and the interfacing to the Vehicle-Model and the DrivMan-Model is done within this model. The driveline is computed with this central unit. A powertrain library called powertrain ‘Generic’ is provided with CarMaker for the most common used powertrain versions. But there is a possibility to add custom models for special needs to the ones offered from the library. The Powertrain models have interfaces to other components needed to obtain a complete powertrain. There are interfaces to the components Engine, Clutch and Gearbox form the next layer in Figure 8.2. Similar to the Powertrain models a library called PowerTrain Com-
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
97
Overview
ponents Library is included with CarMaker and offers models for each individual component. At this level it is also possible to add custom models to extend the library with components for special needs. As visible in Figure 8.2 the integration of custom models is seamless. As long as the specified interface of each module is regarded custom modules can be mixed with standard modules as desired.
8.1.3
Interfaces of Powertrain Subsystems The standard powertrains provided with the powertrain ‘Generic’ library are modeled as rigid systems with five degrees of freedom. There are four wheels and the engine potentially rotating with different speeds. There has to be a differential equation for each degree of freedom in such a model. In general rotation speeds are calculated by integration of the moment-balance:
∑T
1 q˙˙x = ----------J Pro j˙
(EQ 30)
x
J Proj is the projected inertia of all connected parts reassessed by transmissions. These calculations beside others are done in the Powertrain-Module which acts as a master unit for all other powertrain submodules (see Figure 8.3).
Another way to look at powertrain submodules is concerned with the interfacing between the powertrain modules themselves and the Vehicle-Model. Table 8.1: lists the types of quantities being exchanged between powertrain subsystems and the Vehicle-Model. Table 8.1: Notation
q
rotation angle
q˙
angular velocity
T from → to
torque from system to system
i
transmission
Figure 8.3 shows each powertrain subsystem and describes the required quantities exchanged between the different submodules: ECU Signals
ECU Signals
ECU Signals
T Clutch2Gearbox T Engine Engine
Clutch q, q˙ Engine
q, q˙ Gearbox
Accelerator Pedal Clutch Pedal Starter activated Ignition on/off
ECU Signals
T Support2Vehicle T Gearbox2DL q, q˙ Wheel iGearbox PowertrainGearbox Computation T Brake q, q˙ Driveshaft T Tire
Gear Selector
Figure 8.3: The PowerTrain Module Interfaces
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
98
Overview
Driveline Model The driveline model transfers the torque from the gearbox output to all driven wheels. The calculation of wheel speeds and other rotation speeds is done in the computation part of this master module. ECU Signals
T GearBox2Driveline Driveline
Gearbox q, q˙ Driveshaft
ΣT i
Integration of rotation speeds ˙ q i, q i
T Support2Vehicle q, q˙ Wheel T Brake T Tire
Figure 8.4: Driveline Mode
8.1.4
General Parameters
Location
Parameters for configuring a powertrain are found in the parameter file for a specific vehicle under /Data/Vehicle/ The following parameters are used globally no matter which specific subsystem is selected. They are mandatory for all configurations and therefore listed as global parameters.
PowerTrain.Kind =
KindStr
With this parameter a powertrain model is selected. The powertrain library provides the following models: PowerTrain.Kind
Description
GenFront
standard front drive vehicle
GenRear
standard rear drive vehicle
Gen2p2Front
front driven vehicle with rear axle hanged on
Gen2p2Rear
rear driven vehicle with front axle hanged on
Gen4WD
four wheel drive vehicle
... Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
PowerTrain.Kind = GenFront PowerTrain.Kind = MyPowertrain
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
99
Powertrain ’Generic’
8.2
Powertrain ’Generic’
8.2.1
Overview This section describes the available powertrain modules provided with the ‘Generic’ library. The models of this library are highly configurable and should meet the needs of the most common configurations.
Supported configurations PowerTrain.Kind
Description
GenFront
standard front drive vehicle
GenRear
standard rear drive vehicle
Gen2p2Front
front driven vehicle with rear axle hanged on
Gen2p2Rear
rear driven vehicle with front axle hanged on
Gen4WD
four wheel drive vehicle
Basically powertrain configurations are distinguished by the number of driven wheels and in addition to this by the number of differential gears used. Figure 8.5 gives an overview of the available configurations:
Front Drive:
GenFront
Gen2p2Front
Rear Drive: Gen4WD GenRear
Gen2p2Rear
Figure 8.5: Configurations overview
The standard front and rear drive configurations use one differential gear to distribute the torque from the drive shaft to the wheels (either at the front or at the rear axle). The 4WD configuration uses one differential gear for every axle and a center differential gear for distributing torque to the front and rear axle. The hanged on configurations also have differential gears for front and rear axle but use a coupling for transferring torque to the hanged on axle. This means that with opened center coupling this configuration acts like a standard front or rear drive.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
100
Powertrain ’Generic’
Supported coupling configurations In addition to this there are several possibilities to add different types of couplings between different shafts of the differential gears in the drive line: left2right
in2left
in2right
Front:
i
Center:
i
front2rear
in2front
hangon
in2rear
Rear:
left2right
in2left
in2right
Figure 8.6: Configuration possibilities for powertrain couplings
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
101
Powertrain ’Generic’
There are several types of couplings for different purposes available. They can be configured for each individual coupling shown in Figure 8.6: Visco Coupling
As a matter of principle a visco coupling is only able to transfer torque if there is a rotation speed difference between both sides of the coupling. This is because a fluid is used for torque transmission like in a hydrodynamic torque converter (Föttinger-Coupling). This means there is no state where a visco coupling is sticking, there has to be slip for torque transmission. For simulation purposes a torque characteristic as a function of rotating speed difference is used. The coupling torque is calculated by: T = f ( ∆ω˙ )
(EQ 31)
A typical characteristic may look like in Figure 8.7
transferred torque
T
0
∆ω˙
rotation speed difference
Figure 8.7: Typical characteristic for a visco coupling
Torque Sensing Coupling
The coupling torque (locking torque) depends on the torque difference between the two coupled shafts. The torque sensing coupling is only useful for the mount positions left2right and front2rear. Figure 8.8 displays the mount position left2right.
TCage
TLow
THigh
TLock Figure 8.8: Principal torque sensing coupling
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
102
Powertrain ’Generic’
With torque sensing couplings there are two common characteristic values. The torque bias and locking ratio are defined as: T High TB = -----------T Low
(EQ 32)
T Lock LR = -----------T Cage
(EQ 33)
1
If T Lock = 0 then T High = T Low = --- T Cage applies for a standard differential gear. If T Lock 2 exists the torques calculate to: 1 T Low = --- ( T Cage – T Lock ) 2 1 T High = --- ( T Cage + T Lock ) 2
(EQ 34)
With (EQ 32), (EQ 33) and (EQ 34) a relationship between torque bias and locking ratio can be determined: TB – 1 LR = ----------------TB + 1
(EQ 35)
The CarMaker implementation of a torque sensing coupling uses a torque bias value as input for each the driven ( T Cage ≥ 0 ) and undriven ( T Cage < 0 ) case. Locked Coupling
This is not a real coupling. It acts like a rigid connection between input and output shaft. It is useful for simulating a locked differential or testing purposes. No matter which mount position is chosen the differential is lock in either case. There are no parameters needed for this coupling.
DVA Locked
With this coupling the locking torque for the configured couplings can be given via modification of DVA quantities.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
103
Powertrain ’Generic’
8.2.2
General Parameters
PowerTrain.Kind =
KindStr
With this parameter a powertrain model is selected. The powertrain ‘Generic’ library provides the following models: PowerTrain.Kind
Description
GenFront
standard front drive vehicle
GenRear
standard rear drive vehicle
Gen2p2Front
front driven vehicle with rear axle hanged on
Gen2p2Rear
rear driven vehicle with front axle hanged on
Gen4WD
four wheel drive vehicle
Example
PowerTrain.Kind = GenRear
PowerTrain.ET.Kind = PowerTrain.Clutch.Kind = PowerTrain.GearBox.Kind =
ETKindStr ClutchKindStr GearBoxKindStr
Selecting powertrain ’Generic’ sub models, see section 8.3 ’Engine Torque’ on page 110, see section 8.4 ’Clutch’ on page 120 and see section 8.5 ’Gear Box’ on page 128.
Inertias
PowerTrain.Engine.I =
value
PowerTrain.Clutch.I_in =
value
All parts of the clutch which should be added up to the engine mass substitute.
PowerTrain.Clutch.I_out =
value
All parts of the clutch which should be added up to the wheel mass substitute if the transmission is in gear.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
104
Powertrain ’Generic’
PowerTrain.GearBox.I_in =
value
All parts of the gearbox which are not added up to the wheel mass substitute. Measured when transmission is in neutral.
PowerTrain.GearBox.I_out = value All parts of the gearbox which are added up to the wheel mass substitute. Measured when transmission is in neutral.
PowerTrain.DriveLine.I_in =
value
Inertia of the rotating diveline elements like shafts and joints.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
105
Powertrain ’Generic’
8.2.3
Model ‘Generic’ Differential Parameters Differential Models ‘Front’ or ‘Rear’ Depending on the powertrain configuration a differential gear is used either for front or rear or both axles. ‘F’ means front, ‘R’ means rear.
PowerTrain.DL.FDiff.I_in = PowerTrain.DL.RDiff.I_in =
value value
Inertia of the input shaft
PowerTrain.DL.FDiff.I_out = PowerTrain.DL.RDiff.I_out =
value value
Inertia of the output shaft
PowerTrain.DL.FDiff.I_Cage = value PowerTrain.DL.RDiff.I_Cage = value Optional. Inertia of the differential cage. Default: 0
PowerTrain.DL.FDiff.i = PowerTrain.DL.RDiff.i =
value value
Transmission ratio from input shaft to cage. Example
PowerTrain.DL.FDiff.i = 3.5
PowerTrain.DL.FDiff.Cpl.Kind = PowerTrain.DL.RDiff.Cpl.Kind=
KindStr KindStr
Optional. Select a coupling model. Default: no coupling is used. Possible values are: Visco, TrqSensing, Locked, DVA_Locked
PowerTrain.DL.FDiff.Cpl.Mounting = PowerTrain.DL.RDiff.Cpl.Mounting=
MountPos MountPos
Optional. Select mounting position. Possible values are: left2right, in2left, in2right Default: left2right.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
106
Powertrain ’Generic’
PowerTrain.DL.FDiff.Cpl.k PowerTrain.DL.RDiff.Cpl.k Optional. Stiffness used for numerical stability when switching from stick to slip. Default: 10
Differential Model ‘Central’ A center differential is only available for Model ‘Gen4WD’.
PowerTrain.DL.CDiff.I_in =
value
Inertia of the input shaft
PowerTrain.DL.CDiff.I_out_front =
value
Inertia of the front output shaft
PowerTrain.DL.CDiff.I_out_rear =
value
Inertia of the rear output shaft
PowerTrain.DL.CFDiff.I_Cage =
value
Optional. Inertia of the differential cage. Default: 0
PowerTrain.DL.CDiff.i_in2cent =
value
Transmission ratio from input shaft to cage of the center differential. Example
PowerTrain.DL.CDiff.i_in2cent = 1.0
PowerTrain.DL.CDiff.TrqRatio_front =
value
Selects the torque distribution between front and rear axle. This paramter specifies how the percentage of the input torque which is transfered to the front axle (the remaining torque goes to the rear axle). The input range is from 0..1 excluding both extremal values. Example
PowerTrain.DL.CDiff.TrqRatio_front = 0.7
This means that 70% of the input torque is transfered to the front axle and 30 % to the rear axle.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
107
Powertrain ’Generic’
PowerTrain.DL.CDiff.Cpl.Kind =
KindStr
Select a coupling model. Possible values are: Visco, TrqSensing, Locked, DVA_Locked
PowerTrain.DL.CDiff.Cpl.Mounting =
MountPos
Optional. Select mounting position. Possible values are: front2rear, in2rear, in2front Default: front2rear.
PowerTrain.DL.CDiff.Cpl.k =
value
Optional. Stiffness used for numerical stability when switching from stick to slip. Default: 10
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
108
Powertrain ’Generic’
8.2.4
Model ‘Generic’ Coupling Parameters Coupling Model ‘Visco’ ‘F’ means front, ‘R’ means rear, ‘C’ means center.
PowerTrain.DL.FDiff.Cpl.Trq_Amplify = value PowerTrain.DL.RDiff.Cpl.Trq_Amplify = value PowerTrain.DL.CDiff.Cpl.Trq_Amplify = value PowerTrain.DL.HangOn.Cpl.Trq_Amplify =value Amplifies the determined value by a given factor
PowerTrain.DL.FDiff.Cpl.Trq_drotv = PowerTrain.DL.RDiff.Cpl.Trq_drotv = PowerTrain.DL.CDiff.Cpl.Trq_drotv = PowerTrain.DL.HangOn.Cpl.Trq_drotv =
value value value value
Characteristic for coupling torque as a function of the rotation speed difference: T = f ( ∆ω˙ ) . ! Syntax
Infofile table mapping with 2 columns
Coupling Model ‘Locked’ No parameters are necessary!
Coupling Model ‘TrqSensing’
PowerTrain.DL.FDiff.Cpl.TrqBias_Driven = PowerTrain.DL.RDiff.Cpl.TrqBias_Driven = PowerTrain.DL.CDiff.Cpl.TrqBias_Driven =
value value value
Specify torque bias value for drive case driven. Value has to be >= 1. Example
PowerTrain.DL.FDiff.Cpl.TrqSensing.TrqBias_Driven = 1.3
PowerTrain.DL.FDiff.Cpl.TrqBias_Dragged = PowerTrain.DL.RDiff.Cpl.TrqBias_Dragged = PowerTrain.DL.CDiff.Cpl.TrqBias_Dragged =
value value value
Specify torque bias value for drive case dragged. Value has to be >= 1. Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
PowerTrain.DL.FDiff.Cpl.TrqSensing.TrqBias_Dragged = 1.2
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
109
Powertrain ’Generic’
Coupling Model ‘DVA_Locked’ No extra parameters needed for coupling model ‘DVA_Locked’! The coupling torque can be set by accessing DVA variables (See section 12.3.2 on page 268).
Coupling Model for Configurations ’Gen2p2Front’ and ’Gen2p2Rear’ One axle is driven, the other one is hanged on. It is parametrized with basic parameters, extended by a hang on coupling.
PowerTrain.DL.HangOn.I_in =
value
Inertia of the input shaft
PowerTrain.DL.HangOn.I_out =
value
Inertia of the output shaft
PowerTrain.DL.HangOn.i =
value
Transmission ratio between gearbox and hangon coupling Example
PowerTrain.DL.Hangon.i = 1.0
PowerTrain.DL.HangOn.Cpl.Kind = KindStr Select a coupling model. Possible values are: Visco, Locked, DVA_Locked
PowerTrain.DL.HangOn.rotv_open =
value
Only for configuration Gen2p2Front! Optional. With this parameter it is possible to implement a disconnect unit for the rear axle. When the vehicle is dragged and the rotation speed is above the specified value the disconnect unit applies. Default: 1e38 (this means no disconnect unit is installed) Example
PowerTrain.DL.HangOn.rotv_open = 100
PowerTrain.DL.HangOn.Cpl.k =
value
Optional. Stiffness used for numerical stability when switching from stick to slip. Default: 10.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
110
Engine Torque
8.3
Engine Torque Overview The engine model is primarily concerned with engine torque. It provides the torque to the clutch input. shaft. The engine rotation itself is calculated externally by the powertrain module. ECU Signals
q, q˙ Engine
T Engine Engine
Clutch
Accelerator Pedal Starter activated Ignition on/off Figure 8.10: Engine Model
As shown in Figure 8.10 the main task of the engine model is to act as a torque source. The output T Engine of the engine model can be calculated with different approaches. This is why several subsystem types for the engine model are distinguished.
PowerTrain.ET.Kind =
KindStr
Selection of the engine subsystem to use. The powertrain components library provides the following engine torque models: Engine Torque Model
Description
Mapping
Characteristics are used to determine the engine torque
Linear
Simple engine torque model, independent from engine speed
DVA
Engine torque is modified via DVA access
... Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
PowerTrain.ET.Kind = Mapping
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
111
Engine Torque
8.3.1
Engine Torque Model ‘Mapping’ This engine torque model uses characteristics to describe the behavior of the engine torque depending on engine speed and throttle position.
Guidelines for configuring the engine torque map A measured standard engine torque map usually does not cover parts below minimal and above maximal engine speed. For the usage with CarMaker it is essential that there are values given above and below those boundaries.
torque [Nm]
Figure 8.11 shows an engine torque map ‘prepared’ for the usage with CarMaker with extended boundaries. The standard speed range of this engine is 500 to 7000 rpm. Above 7000 rpm usually the throttle cutoff applies. This is realized through ramping down the full load characteristics to zero at 8000 rpm and extrapolating the drag load characteristic to 8000 rpm. Interim values for throttle positions should be equally spaced between full and drag load. 200
150
100
50
0
-50
-100 0
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
rotation speed [rpm] Gas Pedal:
0%
CarMaker Model Check
10%
20%
30%
40%
50%
60%
70%
80%
90%
Engine Torque Wed May 26 11:58:32 AM CEST 2004, Page 1
Figure 8.11: Sample engine torque map
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
112
Engine Torque
The engine idle speed is designated to be approximately 900 rpm. In reality the engine has an idle speed controller to keep the engine running at the desired idle speed. To accomplish this behavior with CarMaker the drag load characteristic should have an area of positive torque values between 600 and 900 rpm.
TEngine / Nm 10 0
1000
nEngine / rpm
-10
Figure 8.12: Drag load characteristic to set up engine idle speed
Figure 8.12 shows a cutout of the engine idle speed characteristic to establish a idle speed of approximately 900 rpm. Due to the zero crossing of the torque characteristics at 900 rpm higher speeds are slowed down due to negative torque and lower speeds are increased by the small amount of positive torque. Like in reality the engine stalls due to negative torque below 600 rpm. For other throttle values a smooth fading should be used (like in Figure 8.11).
Parameters
PowerTrain.ET.Mapping.Kind =
KindStr
This model supports two subsystems to be selected. PowerTrain.ET.Kind
Description
linear2D
A two dimensional engine characteristic map is used. Depends on engine speed and (driver-)gas.
DragFullLoad
Two characteristic lines are used. One for full throttle and one for minimal throttle (depending from engine speed)
PowerTrain.ET.nIdle =
value
Optional. If not defined the engine idle speed is determined out of the given characteristics. This is only an informational parameter for the engine model. It is not determined to set the engine idle speed. This is done by modifying the engine drag characteristic. See section on page 110.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
113
Engine Torque
PowerTrain.ET.Starter.Trq =
value
Optional. Default starter torque is 10Nm.
PowerTrain.ET.Starter.rotvOff =
value
Optional. Turn off engine speed of the starter. If not given determined out of the given characteristics.
PowerTrain.ET.TrqKl15Off =
value
Optional. Engine drag with ignition off. Default -80Nm.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
114
Engine Torque
Additional Parameters for Mapping Kind ‘linear2D’ If linear2d is selected with PowerTrain.ET.Kind the following parameters have to be specified:
PowerTrain.ET.Mapping.Amplify = value Optional. Amplifies the output of the engine characteristic by a given factor. Default: 1.
PowerTrain.ET.Mapping.Data :
value
Two dimensional characteristic for the engine torque mapping. Specifies blocks for equal speed and vary gas from min to max. Syntax
Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
Infofile table mapping with 3 columns <engine speed> PowerTrain.ET.Mapping.Data: 500 0.0 500 0.5 500 1 ..... 1000 0.0 1000 0.5 1000 1 ....
<engine torque>
-90 -70 -50 0 80 150
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
115
Engine Torque
Additional Parameters for Mapping Kind ‘DragFullLoad’ If DragFullLoad is selected with PowerTrain.ET.Kind the following parameters have to be specified:
PowerTrain.ET.Exponent =
value
Transition from full load to drag load characteristic with a exponential function depending on throttle position. •
gas = 0 ... 1.0
•
Exponent = 1 → linear
•
Exponent > 1→ parabolic
•
Exponent < 1 → root shaped
x = TDrag ⋅ ( 1.0 – gas
Exponent
) + TFull ⋅ gas
Exponent
PowerTrain.ET.DragPower.Amplify =value Optional. Amplifies the output of the engine characteristic by a given factor. Default: 1.
PowerTrain.ET.DragPower =
value
Drag power characteristic. Syntax
Infofile table mapping with 2 columns <engine speed>[rpm] <engine torque> [Nm]
Example
PowerTrain.ET.DragPower: 500.0 -10.0 600.0 0.0 700.0 5.0 800.0 0.0 1000.0 -10.0 2000.0 -20.0 3000.0 -30.0 4000.0 -40.0 5000.0 -50.0 6000.0 -60.0 7000.0 -70.0 8000.0 -80.0
PowerTrain.ET.FullLoadPower.Amplify = value Optional. Amplifies the output of the engine characteristic by a given factor. Default: 1.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
116
Engine Torque
PowerTrain.ET.FullLoadPower Full load power characteristic. Syntax
Infofile table mapping with 2 columns <engine speed>[rpm] <engine torque> [Nm]
Example
PowerTrain.ET.FullLoadPower: 500.0 1000.0 2000.0 3000.0 4000.0 4500.0 5000.0 6000.0 7000.0 8000.0
CarMaker Reference Manual
10.0 140.0 155.0 165.0 180.0 185.0 182.0 168.0 130.0 0.0
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
117
Engine Torque
8.3.2
Engine Torque Model ‘Linear’
PowerTrain.ET.nIdle =
value
Optional. Default engine idle speed: 1200rpm
PowerTrain.ET.Starter.Trq =
value
Optional. Default starter torque is 15Nm.
PowerTrain.ET.Starter.rotvOff =
value
Optional. Turn off engine speed of the starter. If not given determined out of the given characteristics.
PowerTrain.ET.TrqKl15Off =
value
Optional. Engine drag with ignition off. Default -80Nm.
PowerTrain.ET.SpeedRange =
rotv_min
rotv_max
Optional. Specifies the minimal and maximal Engine Speed. Below and above those speeds the engine torque is regulated down. A ramp function is used. Example
PowerTrain.ET.SpeedRange = 500 8000
PowerTrain.ET.PowerRatio =
value
This specifies the maximum engine torque with full throttle. It is independently of the engine speed. The engine speed is calculated by Trq = PowerRatio ⋅ Gas . Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
PowerTrain.ET.PowerRatio = 300
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
118
Engine Torque
8.3.3
Engine Torque Model ‘DVA’ This is a simple engine torque model. The engine torque only depends on the gas pedal position. There is no dependency on the rotation speed of the engine (as for a usual engine). Parameters
PowerTrain.ET.Trq_Ext2A =
value
The engine output torque directly depends on the driver gas pedal position (standardized) and is calculated by: EngineTrq = PowerTrain.ET.Trq_Ext2A * Gas
(EQ 36)
Default value: 100 Nm The name of the UAQ you can overwrite by a DVA write is "PT.Engine.DVA.Trq_Ext2A". Example
PowerTrain.ET.Trq_Ext2A = 100
PowerTrain.ET.TrqKl15Off =
value
Optional. Engine drag with ignition off. Default -80Nm.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
119
Engine Torque
8.3.4
Engine Model Software Interfaces Engine Controller Usually vehicle dynamic controllers communicate with the engine controller. One reason is to make modifications to the present engine torque in order to increase driving stability. In an CarMaker/HIL approach without a having a real engine controller a functionality has to be implemented as a model that simulates the intervention of the vehicle dynamic controller to the engine torque. This is realized in CarMaker with a user code function (usually in module User.c) Listing 8.1: Usage of user code function EngineControl in User.c 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: 21: 22: 23: 24: 25: 26: 27: 28: 29: 30: 31: 32: 33: 1:
tatic void EngineControl (void); int User_TestRun_Start (void) { ... /* activate an engine control software module */ Vehicle.EngineControl = EngineControl; ... } /* ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** */
EngineControl () Simulation model for an engine control ECU Modify the engine torque (PowerTrain.Engine.Trq), in most cases based on an static engine torque characteristic. Call: - called after EngineTrq model (PowerTrain.Engine.Trq is assigned with the output of EngineTrq model) - pay attention to realtime condition
static void EngineControl (void) { if (ConnectedIO == MyIO) { ... /* Modify engine torque */ ... PowerTrain.Engine.Trq = MyModifiedTorque; }
Line 1 defines a static function EngineControl in module User.c . In order to make CarMaker to call this function in every simulation step its pointer has to be liked to the variable Vehicle.EngineControl. This is done in the function User_TestRun_Start. The finally modified engine torque has to be assigned at the end of EngineControl to the variable PowerTrain.Engine.Trq.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
120
Clutch
8.4
Clutch Overview The clutch calculates the torque transfer from the engine to the gearbox input shaft considering the clutch pedal or ECU signals. ECU Signals T Clutch2GearBox
T Engine Engine
Gearbox
Clutch q, q˙ Engine
q, q˙ Gearbox Clutch Pedal
Figure 8.13: Clutch Model
PowerTrain.Clutch.Kind =
KindStr
Selection of the clutch subsystem to use. The powertrain components library provides the following submodels: Powertrain.Clutch.Kind
Description
Converter
torque converter model usually used in combination with automatic transmissions
Manual
manual clutch model usually hand-operated by the driver
DVA
Clutch torque is modified via DVA access
... Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
PowerTrain.Clutch.Kind = Manual
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
121
Clutch
8.4.1
Clutch Model ‘Manual’ A manual clutch in reality consists of two plates a friction plate and a contact pressure plate. The transmissible torque depends of the contact pressure and the speed difference between the two plates. In a real time environment with fixed step integrators modeling a technical system like a clutch is a challenging task. With conventional methods usually problems occur when transiting from slip to the singularity stick and vice versa. For a better computation stability the modeling approach of the clutch in this powertrain is sightly more complex.
T ω, ω˙ input plate
Engine
output plate
T In2Fp T Fp2In
ω Out, ω˙ Out
Gearbox
⇒
{ {
⇒
ω In, ω˙ In
friction plate ω Fp, ω˙ Fp
Case: open
Case: closed
Figure 8.14: Structure of Clutch Model Manual
Figure 8.14 shows the non physical approach of this model which uses three plates for transmitting the torque from the engine to the gearbox. The plates form engine side to gearbox side are called “input-”, “friction-” and “output-plate”. The “input-” and the “friction-plate” form a system with pure friction which is used to cover the case clutch is opened respectively is slipping. The remaining two plates form the counterpart for the closed clutch where a spring loaded force element is added to the friction part. Both parts of this clutch system contribute their moment to the resulting clutch moment which is transmitted through the clutch: T In2Out = T fIn2Fp + T kdFp2Out
(EQ 37)
To determine how much every system is contributing (or which case applies the most at one stage) a weighting function is used. Internally a normalized pedal position within ConnectPos and DisconnectPos is used. Below ConnectPos no torque is transmitted and above DisconnectPos the clutch is fully closed. PedalPos Norm = x ( PedalPos – ConnectPos )
(EQ 38)
The factor x in (EQ 38) is estimated so that the range [0 .. 1] is adhered. A simple weighting function is derived from the normalized pedal position: λ = PedalPos Norm
CarMaker Reference Manual
(EQ 39)
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
122
Clutch
•
Calculation of the case “clutch open”: ∆ω˙ In2Fp = ω˙ Fp – ω˙ In
(EQ 40)
T fmax = ( 1.0 – λ ) ⋅ Trq_max_fric
(EQ 41)
T fmax is the maximum transmittable torque for the case clutch open. The real transmit-
ted torque calculates to:
T fIn2FP = min ( T fmax , d_fric ⋅ – ω˙ In2Fp ) •
(EQ 42)
Calculation of the case “clutch closed”: This case makes the assumption that the speed of the “input-” and the “friction plate” are equal ω˙ Fp ≡ ω˙ In . This also means that following (EQ 40) and (EQ 42) T fIn2Fp calculates to zero and only this part is contributing the torque transmission. ∆ω˙ Fp2Out = ω˙ Out – ω˙ In
(EQ 43)
∆ω Fp2Out = ω Out – ω Fp
(EQ 44)
T kdmax = ( 1.0 – λ ) ⋅ Trq_max
(EQ 45)
With
the transmitted torque calculates to: T kdFp2Out = min ( T kdmax , k_FP ⋅ – ω FP2Out + d_FP ⋅ – ω˙ Fp2Out )
(EQ 46)
Parameters
PowerTrain.Clutch.ConnectPos =
value
Optional. At this clutch pedal position the clutch starts transferring torque. Default: 0.3 [0 .. 1]. Example
PowerTrain.Clutch.ConnectPos = 0.3
PowerTrain.Clutch.DisconnectPos =
value
Optional. At this clutch pedal position the clutch starts slipping when opening. Default: 0.7 [0 .. 1] Example
PowerTrain.Clutch.DisconnectPos = 0.7
PowerTrain.Clutch.Trq_max =
value
Optional. Sets maximum transmissible torque equally for both cases, clutch is slipping and clutch is closed Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
PowerTrain.Clutch.Trq_max = 300
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
123
Clutch
Alternatively the maximum transmissible torque can be set independently with the following two parameters.
PowerTrain.Clutch.Trq_max_fric = value Optional. Maximum transmissible torque when clutch is slipping.Default: 300. Example
PowerTrain.Clutch.Trq_max_fric = 300
PowerTrain.Clutch.Trq_max_kd =
Syntax
value
PowerTrain.Clutch.Trq_max_kd = val [Nm] optional, default 300 Nm
Maximum transmissible torque when clutch is closed. Example
PowerTrain.Clutch.Trq_max_kd = 300
PowerTrain.Clutch.d_fric =
Syntax Info
value
PowerTrain.Clutch.d_fric = val [–] optional, default 0.0175
Optional, unit: Nm/deg. Friction coefficient for the case clutch is slipping. Example
PowerTrain.Clutch.d_fric = 0.0175
PowerTrain.Clutch.k_FP =
value
Optional, unit: Nm/deg; default: 1.6667 Nm/deg. Spring constant for the case clutch is closed. Example
PowerTrain.Clutch.k_FP = 1.6667
PowerTrain.Clutch.d_FP =
value
Optional, unit: Nm s/deg. Friction coefficient for the case clutch is closed. Default: 0.1167 Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
PowerTrain.Clutch.d_FP = 0.1167
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
124
Clutch
8.4.2
Clutch Model ‘Converter’ A hydrodynamic torque converter or Föttinger-Converter is able to reduce rotation speed and translate torque. The input and output torque TIn,Out of the converter is calculated with the speed ratio dependent converter factors kIn, kOut and the input speed ωIn. 2
T In = k In ω In
k In, k Out = f ( s )
mit
2
T Out = k Out ω Out
ω Out s = ----------ω In (EQ 47)
The relation between the converter output- and the input-torque is often described with the torque ratio µ. T Out k Out µ = ---------- = ---------T In k In
(EQ 48)
So, two characteristics kIn (s) and µ (s) respectively kOut(s) are used to represent the transmission behavior of the converter. Those characteristics use the following parameter names in CarMaker input files: kIn µ
PowerTrain.Clutch.k_E PowerTrain.Clutch.mue
converter factor kIn (Nms2)
Figure 8.15 shows a typical gradient of the converter factor kIn over the speed ratio nOut/nIn:
1.7 e-3
1 e-4 0
rotation speed ratio nOut /nIn
1 0.98
Figure 8.15: converter factor kIn as a function of the rotation speed ratio
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
125
Clutch
As depicted in Figure 8.16 the maximum torque ratio (usually 1.9 to 2.5) for the driveway reduces with increasing rotation speed ratios. Above a certain speed ratio the torque ratio remains constantly shortly below 1 (because of losses). This case is called clutch mode.
torque ratio m = Tout/Tin
2.3
0.98
0
rotation speed ratio nout/nin
0.88
1
Figure 8.16: torque ratio as a function of the rotation speed ratio
Parameters
PowerTrain.Clutch.Adjust =
value
For principal adaption of converter characteristics. This factor is multiplied with PowerTrain.Clutch.k_E. This parameter needs to be 1 to obtain the given characteristic! Otherwise the characteristic for PowerTrain.Clutch.k_E is altered by this factor
Example
PowerTrain.Clutch.Adjust = 1.0
PowerTrain.Clutch.k_E =
Table
Characteristic for the input torque conversion factor.! Syntax
Infofile table mapping with 2 columns <nout/nin>
Example
PowerTrain.Clutch.k_E: 0.0 3.3e-4 0.3 3.2e-4 0.6 3.0e-4 0.9 2.2e-4 0.95 1.8e-4 0.975 1.2e-4 0.995 1.7e-5 1.0 0
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
126
Clutch
PowerTrain.Clutch.mue : =
Table
Torque ratio characteristic. Syntax
Infofile table mapping with 2 columns <nout/nin> <mue>
Example
PowerTrain.Clutch.mue: 0.0 2.1 0.8 0.98 0.9 0.98 1.0 0.98
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
127
Clutch
8.4.3
Clutch Model ‘DVA’ This model is not a conventional clutch model. The transmissible torque is not determined by the rotations speed difference of the clutches input and output shaft and the pedal actuation. T Clutch2Gearbox DVA
PT.Clutch.DVA.Trq_A2B
Gearbox
Clutch q, q˙ Gerarbox
Figure 8.17: Clutch Model DVA
The user can specify a torque by modifying a DVA variable. T Clutch2Gerbox = PT.Clutch.DVA.Trq_A2B
(EQ 49)
This model decouples the engine model since only the user specified torque is transferred to the gearbox input shaft.
Parameters This model has no parameters.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
128
Gear Box
8.5
Gear Box Overview The primarily task of the gearbox subsystem is the transmission of rotation speed and torque from the input- to the output-shaft according to Figure 8.18. ECU Signals T Gearbox2DL iGearBox
T Clutch2GearBox Clutch
Driveline
Gearbox q, q˙ Driveshaft
q, q˙ Gearbox Gear Selector
Figure 8.18: Gearbox Model
PowerTrain.GearBox.Kind =
KindStr
Selection of the gearbox subsystem to use. The powertrain components library provides the following gearbox models: Powertrain.GearBox.Kind
Description
Manual
currently only a manual transmission is available
DVA
Transmission ratio is modified via DVA access
... Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
PowerTrain.GearBox.Kind = Manual
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
129
Gear Box
8.5.1
GearBox Model ‘Manual’ The selection of the gear ratio with the manual transmission model is done by user requirements or the driver model (IPG-DRIVER). The transmission of torque is calculated by this simple approach: T Out = i G ⋅ M In
(EQ 50)
The change from one gear ratio to another has to proceed in a certain time period because it is impossible to accelerate the transmission input inertia unlimited. This synchronization process is modeled through a constant gear change duration (parameterizable). The transmission rate is adjusted continuously during this procedure.
PowerTrain.GearBox.iForwardGears =
GearRatioList
State the transmission ratio for every single forward gear. Example
PowerTrain.GearBox.iForwardGears = 3.4 1.9 1.35 1.05 0.8
PowerTrain.GearBox.iBackwardGears =
GearRatioList
State the transmission ratio for every single backward gear. Example
PowerTrain.GearBox.iBackwardGears = -4.0
PowerTrain.GearBox.nFit =
value
OPtional. This defines the number of cycle times (or milliseconds) used for the synchronization process. Default: 50 Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
PowerTrain.GearBox.nFit = 50
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
130
Gear Box
8.5.2
GearBox Model ‘DVA’ This model is not a conventional gearbox model. The transmission is not determined by the selected gear ratio. PT.GearBox.DVA.i
T Gearbox2DL iGearbox
T Clutch2Gearbox Clutch
Driveline
Gearbox q, q˙ Gearbox
q, q˙ Driveshaft
Figure 8.19: Gearbox Model DVA
The user can specify a transmission ratio by modifying a DVA variable: T Clutch2Gerbox = PT.GearBox.DVA.i
(EQ 51)
Parameters This model has no parameters.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
131
User Accessible Quantities for PowerTrain
8.6
User Accessible Quantities for PowerTrain Please refer to section 12.3 ’User Accessible Quantities: Power Train’
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
132
Powertrain Software Interface
8.7
Powertrain Software Interface The powertrain uses the global data structure PowerTrain to exchange signals form one subsystem to the other and to enable the user to observe the powertrain. Figure 8.20: gives a structural overview for the exchanged quantities. Inputs needed come from subsystems DrivMan (simulation of the vehicles virtual control elements), Car and Brake.
Inputs
Outputs
DrivMan DrivMan.Gas DrivMan.Clutch DrivMan.GearNo DrivMan.StarterCtrl DrivMan.Ignition
Engine PowerTrain.Engine_on PowerTrain.Engine_rotv
Car Car.Trq_T2W
Wheel PowerTrain.W.rotv PowerTrain.W.rot PowerTrain.W.Trq_B2W
GearBox PowerTrain.GearBox_rotv_in
PowerTrain
PowerTrain PowerTrain.Trq2Bdy1 Brake Brake.Trq_
Legend =FL/FR/RL/RR Figure 8.20: Inputs and Outputs of the Power Train
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
PowerTrain
133
Powertrain Software Interface
Listing 2.3 shows the framework of the powertrain data structure from header file PowerTrain.h. For further details please refer to this file. Listing 8.2: Interface Data Structure struct tPowerTrain { struct tPTEngine { } Engine; struct tPTClutch { } Clutch; struct tPTGearBox { } GearBox; struct tPTDriveLine { } DriveLine; struct tPTWheel { } WFL, WFR, WRL, WRR; double
Trq_Supp2Bdy1[3];
}; struct tPowerTrain PowerTrain;
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Brake System
135
Overview
Chapter 9
Brake System
9.1
Overview CarMaker offers for every purpose an appropriate brake system model. There are different interests for using a specific brake system model. A simple brake model is sufficient if the main interest of investigation is not concerned with the brake system and no electronic brake controller is used. It is good for driving maneuvers with simple braking tasks. If the interest is based on the brake system itself or if a brake ECU has to be satisfied there is a high resolution brake model available which is exclusively parameterizable. The aim is to represent the real braking system as closely as possible in combination with real time computing constraints.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Brake System
136
Overview
9.1.1
Brake Interface Internally CarMaker uses an interface structure for exchanging signals with the brake model. Inputs from different CarMaker modules are grouped in the interface structure (for details see header file Brake.h or section 9.2 on page 137). Figure 9.1 shows the input quantities to the interface structure.
DrivMan.Brake Trq[4]
IO.HydValve[12] IO.PumpIsOn IO.BooSignal
Brake Model Calculation The user selected Brake Model is calculated with this function
Brake Interface Struct (Output-Quantities)
Brake Interface Struct (Input-Quantities)
DrivMan.BrakePark
pWB[4]
Pump
return volt.
ExtInp_IF.PactUnit.Value Ambient.Temperature Figure 9.1: Structure of Brake Interface
The box in the middle shows the changeable brake model which can be a simple or a high resolution brake model from the CarMaker brake library or any customer specific brake model which satisfies the brake interface structure. The input from the interaction controls of the brake system are provided from the DrivMan module and displayed DrivMan.x quantities. For a brake ECU in the Loop the information about valve positions and other output of the brake ECU is needed as input into the brake model. Those signals are acquired from the CarMaker IO module and shown as the IO.x input signals in Figure 9.1 For special purposes, e. g. control the master cylinder pressure with data records from an external input file, there is a separate input for the pressure of the master cylinder (ExtInp_IF.PactUnit.Value). For several reasons the environment temperature is needed for some calculations within brake models. this is why there is a separate input for the ambient temperature (Ambient.Temperature). In terms of embedding the brake model within the CarMaker vehicle environment only the estimated brake torque for each wheel are needed as output values. But there are a number of other output quantities as indicated by the arrows characterizing the output quantities (for details see header fileBrake.h or section 9.2 on page 137). Depending on the brake model used not all output quantities are calculated and therefore not updated.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Brake System
137
Brake System Software Interface
9.2
Brake System Software Interface Listing 9.1: Interface structure to the brake system calculation function 2: /*** Brake Interface: Interface to the brake calculation function 3: 4: typedef struct tBrakeIF { 5: 6: /*** Input Quantities: */ 7: int Use_pMCInput; /* use pressure input instead of force 8: 9: double Pedal;/* brake pedal actuation */ 10: double Park;/* park brake actuation */ 11: double pMC_in; /* optional input: Master cylinder pressure 12: 13: double V[16]; /* relative Valve signals [0..1] 14: * 0-3: Inlet FL/FR/RL/RR, opened if 0 15: * 4-7: Outlet FL/FR/RL/RR, closed if 0 16: * 8: Pilot Valve FR/RL, opened if 0 17: * 9: Pilot Valve FL/RR, opened if 0 18: * 10: Suction Valve FR/RL, closed if 0 19: * 11: Suction Valve FL/RR, closed if 0 20: int PumpIsOn; /* hydraulic pump 21: double BooSignal; /* booster input signal 22: 23: double T_env; /* Temperature of the environment [K] 24: 25: /*** Output Ouantities: */ 26: double pMC; /* pressure actuation unit (master cylinder) [bar] 27: double pWB[4]; /* pressures wheel brakes FL/FR/RL/RR [bar] 28: double Trq_WB[4]; /* wheel brake torques FL/FR/RL/RR [Nm] 29: double Trq_PB[4]; /* parking brake torques 30: double Trq_ext[4]; /* external (or additional) brake torques 31: double Trq_tot[4]; /* total brake toques (used for wheel rotation) 32: 33: int Rel_SW; /* booster release switch 34: double PuRetVolt; /* induced voltage of the hydraulic pump 35: 36: double PedFrc; /* force on the brake pedal 37: double PedTravel; /* travel of the brake pedal [mm] 38: double PistTravel; /* travel of the master cylinder [mm] 39: double DiaphTravel; /* travel of the booster diaphragm 40: 41: /*** Optional Input/Output Quantities: */ 42: double OptDblIO[8];/* HydESP: [0] := pump pwm control */ 43: long OptLngIO[4]; 44: void *OptPtrIO; 45: 46: } tBrakeIF; 47:
*/
*/
*/ * * * * * * */ */ */ */
*/ */ */ */ */ */ */ */ */ */ */ */
Calculation Function int (*Eval) (void *BP, tBrakeIF *IF, double dt);
CarMaker Reference Manual
/* Modellparameter/Instanzpointer /* Interface structure /* time step
*/ */ */
Version 2.1.6
Brake System
138
General Brake System Parameters
9.3
General Brake System Parameters The parameters explained here apply for all brake models and are stored in the vehicle data file.
Selection of the Brake Model
Brake.Kind =
KindStr
Specifies which brake model is used. Used if brake parameters are specified in the Vehicle Data File. Possible values are: Brake.Kind
Description
PresDistrib
simple brake model, for details see section 9.5 on page 142
HydESP
high resolution brake model, for details see section 9.6 on page 144
Example
Brake.Kind = HydESP
Brake.FName =
FName
This references a brake model from a file including all other (not listed here) brake parameters. The file is read from the subdirectory Data/Misc. The model type is determined from the FileIdent parameter (should be the first line in the external file). Currently this is only available for the model HydESP (FileIdent = CarMaker-Brake-HydESP 3). If Brake.FName is specified the parameter Brake.Kind is not taken into account.
Example
Brake.FName = HydESP_DemoParam
Brake.Torque.Amplify =
ValueList
Multiplies the specific brake torque of the wheel, which has been calculated by the brake model with this factor [-]. Four factors in the order front left, front right, rear left, rear right. Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
Brake.TorqueAmplify = 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Version 2.1.6
Brake System
139
General Brake System Parameters
Parking Brake CarMaker distinguishes between brake and parking brake. The parking brake model is not contained in the changeable brake module selected with Brake.Kind or Brake.FName and remains for all models the same. It is implemented as a fixed system within the CarMakers car model.
Brake.Park.Trq_max =
ValueList
Maximum parking brake torque at each wheel [Nm]. Four values in the order front left, front right, rear left, rear right. Example
Brake.HandTorque.Value = 0 0 1000 1000
In this example the parking brake acts only on the rear wheels.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Brake System
140
User Accessible Quantities
9.4
User Accessible Quantities
9.4.1
General User Accessible Quantities for Brake Systems Name
Unit
Booster activation signal (0..1)
Brake.BooSignal
Brake.DiaphTravel
Info
m
Travel of the booster diaphragm Brake pedal actuation (0..1)
Brake.Pedal Brake.PedFrc
N
Force applied on brake pedal
Brake.PedTravel
m
Brake pedal travel
Brake.PistTravel
m
Travel of brake piston Park brake actuation (0..1)
Brake.Park
Brake.pMC
bar
Master cylinder pressure
Brake.pMC_in
bar
Input of master cylinder pressure to hydraulic model if input mode ‘Use_pMCInput’ ist selected in the brake interface. Hydraulic pump activated
Brake.PumpIsOn Brake.PuRetVolt
V
Hydraulic pump return voltage
Brake.pWB_FL
bar
Brake pressure front left
Brake.pWB_FR
bar
Brake pressure front right
Brake.pWB_RL
bar
Brake pressure rear left
Brake.pWB_RR
bar
Brake pressure rear right Brake booster release switch actuated
Brake.Rel_SW
Brake.T_env
K
Environment temperature for brake
Brake.Trq_FL
Nm
Brake torque front left
Brake.Trq_FR
Nm
Brake torque front right
Brake.Trq_RL
Nm
Brake torque rear left
Brake.Trq_RR
Nm
Brake torque rear right
Brake.Trq_PB_FL
Nm
Brake torque of park brake front left
Brake.Trq_PB_FR
Nm
Brake torque of park brake front right
Brake.Trq_PB_RL
Nm
Brake torque of park brake rear left
Brake.Trq_PB_RR
Nm
Brake torque of park brake rear right
Brake.Trq_FL_ext
Nm
External brake torque front left
Brake.Trq_FR_ext
Nm
External brake torque front right
Brake.Trq_RL_ext
Nm
External brake torque rear left
Brake.Trq_RR _ext
Nm
External brake torque rear right
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Brake System
141
User Accessible Quantities
Name
Unit
Info
Brake.Trq_FL_tot
Nm
Total brake torque (trq+trq_park+ trq_ext) front left
Brake.Trq_FR_tot
Nm
Total brake torque (trq+trq_park+ trq_ext) front right
Brake.Trq_RL_tot
Nm
Total brake torque rear left (trq+trq_park+ trq_ext)
Brake.Trq_RR _tot
Nm
Total brake torque rear right (trq+trq_park+ trq_ext)
Brake.Valve_In_FL
Valve activity for inlet valve front left (0..1)
Brake.Valve_In_FR
Valve activity for inlet valve front right (0..1)
Brake.Valve_In_RL
Valve activity for inlet valve rear left (0..1)
Brake.Valve_In_RR
Valve activity for inlet valve rear right (0..1)
Brake.Valve_Out_FL
Valve activity for outlet valve front left (0..1)
Brake.Valve_Out_FR
Valve activity for outlet valve front right (0..1)
Brake.Valve_Out_RL
Valve activity for outlet valve rear left (0..1)
Brake.Valve_Out_RR
Valve activity for outlet valve rear right (0..1)
Brake.Valve_PV_0
Valve activity for pilot valve 0
Brake.Valve_PV_1
Valve activity for pilot valve 1
Brake.Valve_SV_0
Valve activity for suction valve 0
Brake.Valve_SV_1
Valve activity for suction valve 1
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
142 Brake System PresDistrib
9.5
Brake System PresDistrib
9.5.1
Overview This is a simple brake model which acts like a conventional one circuit brake.
Tfr
masterbrakecylinder
brake pedal
Trr force or position
pMC
Trl
Tfl
Figure 9.2: principle of brake model ‘PresDistrib
A master brake pressure is build proportional to the input value of the brake pedal. p MC = PF2pMC ⋅ F ped
(EQ 52)
p MC = PP2pMC ⋅ x ped
(EQ 53)
or
The braking torque for each individual wheel is calculated by T i = p MC ⋅ pWB2Trq i with i = fl, fr, rl, rr p MC F ped x ped Ti PF2pMC PP2pMC pWB2Trq i
CarMaker Reference Manual
(EQ 54)
pressure of master brake cylinder brake pedal force brake pedal position brake torque at wheel i conversion factor from brake pedal force to master brake cylinder pressure conversion factor from brake pedal position to master brake cylinder pressure conversion factor from master brake cylinder pressure to wheel brake torque
Version 2.1.6
143 Brake System PresDistrib
9.5.2
Brake System PresDistrib Parameters
Brake.pMC_based_on This parameter specifies how the master brake pressure is determined. Brake.pMC_Based_on
Description
PedalPos
Master brake pressure depends on brake pedal position (Default).
PedalForce
Master brake pressure depends on brake pedal force.
The Brake pressure in the master cylinder is proportional to either pedal position or pedal force. Example
Brake.pMC_based_on = PedalPos
Brake.PedalPos2pMC This parameter is valid if ‘PedalPos’ is selected with Brake.pMC_Based_on. This factor determines the master brake cylinder pressure according to (EQ 53) [bar].
Brake.PedalForce2pMC This parameter is valid if ‘PedalForce’ is selected with Brake.pMC_Based_on. This factor determines the master brake cylinder pressure according to (EQ 52) [bar].
Brake.pWB2Trq Ratio wheel pressure to brake torque, see (EQ 54) [-]. Specify 4 values for fl, fr, rl, rr wheel. Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
Brake.pWB2Trq =
16.0
16.0
7.0
7.0
Version 2.1.6
144 Brake System HydESP
9.6
Brake System HydESP
9.6.1
Overview Structure of the braking system A standard car braking system consists of two brake circuits, each one applying two wheel brakes. Also this model can be used with two different brake-circuit configurations: In the diagonal (X-pattern) system, each brake circuit applies on a front wheel brake and a rear wheel brake on the opposite side. In the system with separate circuits for the front and rear axle (II-pattern), each circuit applies the brakes on one axle. The two circuits are called primary and secondary circuit. In reality as well as in the model the two circuits are identical. The following picture shows a brake system with ESP. Only the primary circuit and only one wheel brake is shown.
brake booster
drive signal brake booster
master cylinder brake pedal
to secondary circuit
pilot valve suction valve
hydraulic pump line volume
attenuator or line volume
low pressure accumulator outlet valve from outlet valve second wheel brake
inlet valve
to inlet valve second wheel brake wheel brake cylinder
Figure 9.3: ESP Braking System
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
145 Brake System HydESP
Interface of the model The HydESP model has interfaces to signals of the driver, the brake ECU and the vehicle. The following lists name the input and output used and generated by the brake model. Inputs
Outputs
•
normalized brake pedal actuation [0..1]
•
drive signals for the solenoid valves: digital or analog [0..1]
•
pump on/off (digital)
•
brake booster drive signal
•
pressure master cylinder
•
pressures wheel brake cylinders
•
brake torques
•
return voltage of the hydraulic pump
•
state of the booster release switch
•
travel of the master cylinder piston
•
travel of the brake pedal
Functional Description Figure 9.3 shows the simplified model of a ESP controlled brake system. The following is a brief description of such a system and how it features are modeled. The brake force applied to the brake pedal by the driver is mechanically transformed into a input force of the brake booster. The brake booster itself amplifies the input force and passes its output to the pistons of the master brake cylinder. There the piston rod force is translated into a master cylinder pressure. The master cylinder has two hydraulic connectors one for each brake circuit. It is assumed that the master cylinder pressure is equal for both brake circuits. The hydraulic part is modeled as a system of alternating volume and connection elements (connecting lines including valves, hydraulic pumps, etc.). This means that from every volume element there is a flow of brake fluid through connection elements to another volume element (depicted in Figure 9.4).
Volume Element 1
Volume Element 2
p 1, V 1
p 2, V 2
Volume Element 3 p 3, V 3
Figure 9.4: Hydraulic model with alternating volume and connection elements
Each volume element is characterized with the state variables pressure and volume. The system tries to equalize pressure differences with a flow from the high pressure to the low pressure volume element. The flow rate is limited by the hydraulic resistance which is a attribute of the connection element. The hydraulic resistance is a combination of the resisCarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
146 Brake System HydESP
tance of the connecting line and the current resistance of the valves (which often is a function of time and/or pressure difference). In case of a hydraulic pump this is reversed and the pump transports fluid from the low pressure side to the high pressure side. As a counterpart to the master brake cylinder the wheel brake cylinder transforms its current pressure into a brake lining force. This force is transformed into a brake torque by the wheel brake itself. The goal of the system of valves, pumps, connection lines and volume elements in case of a ESP system is to control the brake torque of each single wheel by regulating the pressure of its wheel brake cylinder. This is done by opening and closing the inlet and outlet valves for a certain amount of time to increase or decrease the brake pressure. To hold the current pressure inlet and outlet valves remain closed at the same time. The hydraulic pump is used to pump fluid back from the low pressure accumulator (where brake fluid is temporarily stored) to the reservoir of the master brake cylinder. In special operation modes of the system when the driver is not actuating the brake pedal the pump is used to generate pressure for autonomous brake interventions. For those operation modes of a ESP system two more controlled valves are needed for each brake circuit (named suction and pilot valves in Figure 9.3). See technical literature for more information how the suction and pilot valves are used and how specific actions are operated. ABS systems have basically the same structure as ESP systems but the suction and pilot valves are omitted. They are not needed because ABS systems do not perform autonomous brake interventions.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
147 Brake System HydESP
9.6.2
Brake circuit configuration
CircuitConfig Optional. This parameter specifies the brake circuit configuration X- vs. II-pattern. (X-pattern = diagonal split, II-pattern = one circuit for one axle). Default: X-pattern. CircuitConfig
Brake Circuit Index
Brake Circuit
Description
X
0
FR/RL
Diagonal split.
1
FL/RR
0
FL/FR
1
RL/RR
II
Example
Parallel (front/rear) split.
CircuitConfig = X
Brake pedal The brake force applied to the brake pedal by the driver is mechanically transformed into a piston rod input force of the brake booster. piston travel
F BooIn
l1 l2
brake pedal
F Pedal
PedalActuation
Pedal2PedalFrc
[ 0..1 ]
pedal travel Figure 9.5: Mechanical amplification of drivers brake force
F BooIn = ratio ⋅ F Pedal
(EQ 55)
Pedal.ratio The pedal ratio amplifies the force of the brake pedal [-]. The resulting force is the input of the brake system. Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
Pedal.ratio = 3.0
Version 2.1.6
148 Brake System HydESP
Brake.Pedal2PedalFrc Optional. This parameters defines the relation between driver brake pedal actuation and brake pedal force F Pedal . Therefore a linear equation is used: F Pedal = PedalActuation ⋅ Pedal2PedalFrc
(EQ 56)
The force [N] defines the maximum brake force with full pedal actuation [1]. Default: 300 N. Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
Brake.Pedal2PedalFrc = 500
Version 2.1.6
149 Brake System HydESP
9.6.3
Brake booster The brake booster amplifies the input force at the piston rod proportionally up to a certain limit. Above this limit there is no more amplification of force.
p MC
F BooOut
p MC
master cylinder
F BooIn
brake booster
Figure 9.6: Amplification of brake actuation force by the brake booster.
The output force of the brake booster F BooOut equals a pressure of the master cylinder. This relation can be calculated with (EQ 60) of the master brake cylinder. Many parameters of the brake booster expect master cylinder pressures as input values instead of booster output forces. See the particular description of these parameters.
Figure 9.7 shows the relation between the input force of the brake booster and the corresponding master cylinder pressure. Before any pressure is build up the precharge force F 0 of the springs in the master cylinder has to be overcome. The following straight is the amplification range of the brake booster: F BooOut = ratio ⋅ F BooIn
(EQ 57)
The amplification ratio is higher than one. When a specific output force (or an corresponding master cylinder) is exceeded the amplification ratio becomes one for any further increase of input force. This pressure is called the booster run out pressure. The corresponding force can be calculated with (EQ 60).
p MC p runout
no amplification of force (ratio=1)
amplification of force (ratio>1)
F0
F runout
F BooIn
Figure 9.7: Brake booster output pressure characteristic
The following brake booster types are provided with this hydraulic model:
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
150 Brake System HydESP
Boo.type Optional. Boo.type determines the type of booster or precharge pump used. Some brake systems additionally use an electric drive of the booster in order to create a brake pressure even if there is no pedal force (e.g. brake assist, ACC). See booster models TargetPressure and PressureGradient. Boo.type
Description
none
Default: No brake booster is used. (Amplification ratio is always one).
Mechanical
Classic mechanical brake booster.
TargetPressure
Booster with pressure proportional to input signal or precharge pump.
PressureGradient
Booster with pressure gradient dp/dt = f(input signal)
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
151 Brake System HydESP
Brake Booster “Mechanical” See Figure 9.7: for explanation of this booster model.
Boo.ampli Amplification ratio when the brake booster is in amplification range [-]. See (EQ 57). Example
Boo.ampli = 7
Boo.runOut Specifies the booster run-out pressure [bar]. Above the run-out pressure the booster amplification is one (no amplification). Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
Boo.runOut = 90
Version 2.1.6
152 Brake System HydESP
Brake Booster “TargetPressure” “TargetPressure” is a model of a controlled system consisting of the mechanical booster and the simulated dynamic behavior of a booster-ECU. Internally this model distinguishes two forces: •
A “interactive” booster force by amplification of the drivers input force like the booster model “mechanical”.
•
A “automatic” booster force which is initiated by the standardized drive signal. The drive signal which is a input quantity of the HydESP brake interface has to be controlled by user code (can be a simulated or real ECU). The output force is proportional to the drive signal (0..1) without any driver interaction necessary for this. The dynamic behavior is calculated within this model. The dynamics of the force increase is modeled by a delay and a exponential saturation function. Additionally a force threshold value for the release switch must be given. The release switch is operated when the piston rod force (driver interaction) exceeds the given threshold force.
The effective booster force calculates as follows: F BooOut = max ( F Boo interactive, F Boo automatic )
(EQ 58)
For the “interactive” case see Figure 9.7: , the “automatic” case is shown in the following illustration:
[p, 0..1]
booster activation signal
p T arg et
booster pressure
t Boo.Delay
Boo.63Prcnt
Figure 9.8: Pressure rise controlled by booster ECU (case “automatic” booster force)
Boo.ampli Amplification ratio when the brake booster is in amplification range [-]. See (EQ 57). Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
Boo.ampli = 7
Version 2.1.6
153 Brake System HydESP
Boo.runOut Specifies the booster run-out pressure [bar]. Above the run-out pressure the booster amplification is one (no amplification). Example
Boo.runOut = 90
Boo.delay Delay between signal and pressure rise [s]. Example
Boo.delay = 0.01
Boo.63Prcnt Time constant for pressure rise [s]. After t = Boo.Delay + Boo.63Pcnt , booster pressure has reached 63% of the target value. Example
Boo.63Prcnt = 0.01
Boo.sign2press This parameter determines the output (target) pressure when booster ECU is active [bar/ 1]. The range of the drive signal is 0..1. p T arg et = Boo.sign2press ⋅ DriveSignal
Example
Boo.sign2press = 1
Boo.relF Pedal force applied by driver to open the release switch [N]. Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
Boo.relF = 10
Version 2.1.6
154 Brake System HydESP
Brake Booster “PressureGradient” “PressureGradient” is a booster model similar to the model “Target Pressure”. The difference is that the drive signal is interpreted in a different way. Like the booster model “Target Pressure” two forces are distinguished: •
A “interactive” booster force by amplification of the drivers input force like the booster model “mechanical”.
•
A “automatic” booster force is initiated by the standardized drive signal of the booster ECU which is a input quantity of the HydESP brake interface. Here the gradient of pressure increase/decrease is a function of the activation signal. The pressure can not exceed a maximum pressure. In this booster model the release switch is operated when the “interactive” pedal force exceeds the force generated by the “automatic” booster force.
In case of an autonomous intervention parallel to a pedal force, the resulting pressure is the maximum of the two pressures: F Booster = max (F Booster manual,F Booster ECU)
(EQ 59)
Input signal
[p, 0..1] Boo.PMax
pressure fall Booster Pressure
pressure rise
t Figure 9.9: Pressure rise with booster model PressureGradient
Boo.ampli Amplification ratio when the brake booster is in amplification range [-]. See (EQ 57). Example
Boo.ampli = 7
Boo.runOut Specifies the booster run-out pressure [bar]. Above the run-out pressure the booster amplification is one (no amplification). Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
Boo.runOut = 90
Version 2.1.6
155 Brake System HydESP
Boo.pMax Maximum pressure difference the booster is able to produce in “automatic” mode (this means booster pressure is controlled by the ECU) [bar]. Example
Boo.pMax = 90
Boo.pGrad.mapping Relation of booster activation signal [0..1] to gradient of pressure rise/fall [bar/s]. . Syntax
Infofile table mapping with 2 columns
Example
Boo.pGrad.mapping: 0.0 -1000.0 0.15 -1000.0 0.3 0.0 0.4 0.0 0.8 400.0 1.0 400.0 1.1 400.0
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
156 Brake System HydESP
9.6.4
Master Cylinder The master cylinder transforms the output force of the brake booster to a brake pressure.
Reservoir
Spring
Compensation Bores
p MC
p MC
Brake Circuit 2
F BooOut
Brake Circuit 1
Figure 9.10: Master Brake Cylinder
F BooOut – F MC, 0 – c MC ⋅ x MC p MC = ----------------------------------------------------------------- for x MC > x CompBore A MC
(EQ 60)
with p MC F BooOut A MC F MC, 0 c MC x MC x CompBore
Master cylinder pressure Brake booster output force Area of master cylinder. Precharge of the springs in MC. Spring constant of the MC springs. Piston travel. Piston travel to close compensation bore.
The pressure generated in the primary circuit is equal to the one in the secondary circuit. When the force is zero, the piston is at the backside stop. The compensation bores are open in this position and lead to a pressure equalization with the compensating reservoir (=atmospheric pressure). Once the force becomes superior to the precharge of the springs, the piston moves forward and closes the compensation bores. The whole brake system is now a closed system and the further movements of the piston are determined by the system’s elasticity.
MC.area Area of the piston [cm2] Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
MC.area = 4.5
Version 2.1.6
157 Brake System HydESP
MC.xCompBore Piston travel to close compensation bore [mm] Example
MC.xCompBore = 2
MC.springConst df N ------ of the spring(s) ---- . dx m
Example
MC.springConst = 1000
MC.springLoad Precharge of the spring(s) [N]. Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
MC.springLoad = 100
Version 2.1.6
158 Brake System HydESP
9.6.5
Wheel brakes The following calculation can be applied to disk or drum brakes because it is very general. Figure 9.11: explains the requested parameters. brake lining
F Brake
r Brake
T Brake
disk or drum brake Figure 9.11: Schematic view of wheel brakes
The pressure in the brake cylinder is transformed into a brake torque as follows: T Brake = F Brake ⋅ r Brake = p Brake ⋅ A BC ⋅ a Brake lining ⋅ r Brake
(EQ 61)
with p Brake Brake pressure T Brake Brake torque. A BC Area of brake cylinder. a Brake lining Brake lining ratio. F Brake Brake force acting at the brake linings. r Brake Effective brake radius transforming force
into torque. The brake lining ratio describes the relation between brake pressure and resulting wheel brake torque. For disc brakes, its value usually is the coulomb number multiplied by 2. (factor 2 because there are brake linings on both sides of the disc). Optionally, a characteristic can be given: a Brake lining = f ( p Brake )
(EQ 62)
The given pairs of values are interpolated linearly. The brake radius is the effective radius to calculate the brake torque out of the brake force. For the following parameters applies: ‘f’ means front or ‘r’ means rear.
Pist_f.area Pist_r.area Total effective area of the ensemble of brake cylinders of one side (outboard or inboard) of brake pistons of a single brake [cm2]. Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
Pist_f.area = 23.0
Version 2.1.6
159 Brake System HydESP
Pist_f.rBrake Pist_r.rBrake Effective brake radius (Brake Force -> Brake Torque) [m]. Example
Pist_f.rBrake = 0.1
For the following parameters applies: ‘fl’, ‘fr’ means front left/right, or ‘rl’, ‘rr’ means rear left/ right.
Pist_fl.ratio Pist_fr.ratio Pist_rl.ratio Pist_rr.ratio Ratio of braking force to actuating force [-]. This parameter takes into account the influence of the internal transmission ratio of the brake as well as the Coulomb friction coefficient. Frequently: 2*Coulomb (factor 2 comes from inboard + outboard brake linings) The ratio must be given for each brake of the four brakes. Example
Pist_fl.ratio = 0.7
Pist_fl.ratio.mapping Pist_fr.ratio.mapping Pist_rl.ratio.mapping Pist_rr.ratio.mapping Optional, instead of Pist_.ratio. Ratio [-] of braking force to actuating force as a function of the applied brake pressure [bar]. . Syntax
Infofile table mapping with 2 columns
Example
Pist_fl.ratio.mapping: 0 50 100 150 200
CarMaker Reference Manual
0.7 0.71 0.72 0.74 0.8
Version 2.1.6
160 Brake System HydESP
9.6.6
Volume elements in general Volume elements have inputs and outputs. The resulting liquid volume leads to a certain pressure in the volume element. This relation is described by a function: p = f ( absorbed liquid volume ) .
(EQ 63)
By definition, the liquid volume of the filled elements at athmospheric pressure is equal to zero.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
161 Brake System HydESP
9.6.7
Wheel brake cylinders The brake cylinders are modeled by the relationship: p = f ( liquid volume ) .
(EQ 64)
The parameters given must describe the sum of the elasticity of the brake cylinder itself as well as of the line between inlet/outlet valve and brake. The characteristic is parametrized by 3 to 20 points (p, V) as shown in the following diagram. Above and below the given points, the curve is extrapolated linearly. p p3
p2 p1 p0 v0
v1
v2
v3
V
Figure 9.12: Pressure Volume Characteristic
For the following parameters applies: ‘f’ means front or ‘r’ means rear.
Cyl_f.pv.mapping Cyl_r.pv.mapping Vector of pressure values [bar] corresponding to volume values [cm3]. It is the volume of brake fluid absorbed by the cylinder at a given pressure. It is crucial that the supporting points for the pressure rise strictly monotonic. . Syntax
Infofile table mapping with 2 columns
Example
Cyl_f.pv.mapping: 0 5 10 15 20 25 40 60 80 80 200
CarMaker Reference Manual
0.00 0.20 0.39 0.56 0.72 0.87 1.28 1.75 2.15 2.15 3.84
Version 2.1.6
162 Brake System HydESP
Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
Cyl_f.pv.mapping: 0
0.00
Cyl_r.pv.mapping: 0 5 10 15 20 25 40 60 80 200
0.00 0.09 0.16 0.25 0.31 0.38 0.55 0.75 0.91 1.69
Version 2.1.6
163 Brake System HydESP
9.6.8
Low pressure accumulator The low pressure accumulator accumulates the liquid coming out of the outlet valves before it is pumped back in the brake circuit. It usually consists of a cylinder with a piston loaded by a spring. The relation between the absorbed liquid and the resulting pressure is modeled by the following characteristic (the gradients below pMin and above pMax are hard-coded). p
pMax pMin vMax
v
Figure 9.13: Pressures in low pressure accumulator
LPA.vMax Maximum Volume of pressure accumulator [cm3]. Example
LPA.vMax = 5.0
LPA.pMin Pressure below which the volume is minimal [bar]. Example
LPA.pMin = 1.0
LPA.pMax Pressure above which the volume is maximal [bar]. Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
LPA.pMax = 5.0
Version 2.1.6
164 Brake System HydESP
9.6.9
Attenuators (damper chambers) and line volumes The discrete modeling of the hydraulic system makes it necessary to alternate between apertures (flow elements) and volume elements. Therefore volume elements are positioned between pilot valve, inlet valve and the high pressure side of the pump as well as between low pressure accumulator check valve, suction valve and suction side of the pump. Those elements represent line volumes or attenuator chambers. They are modeled by proportional characteristics:
p dp2dv 1 v Figure 9.14: Proportional characteristics of attenuators and line volumes
In real brake systems, those line volumes are very small. Nonetheless for numerical reasons, those elements should not be parametrized too stiff, even if the value given doesn’t represent the real physical value.
Att.dp2dv The attenuator is situated at the high pressure side of the pump. For numerical reasons, its value should not be too high [bar/cm3]. p = dp2dv ⋅ v
Example
(EQ 65)
Att.dp2dv = 300.0
SuppL.dp2dv The suction line volume is situated at the low pressure side of the hydraulic pump. For numerical reasons, the value given should not be too high [bar/cm3]. p = dp2dv ⋅ v
Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
(EQ 66)
SuppL.dp2dv = 50.0
Version 2.1.6
165 Brake System HydESP
9.6.10
Hydraulic pump (return pump) The pumps for both circuits are driven by the same motor. The static and dynamic characteristic of the pump can be parametrized. •
Static characteristic: -
The flow is proportional to the rotational velocity. The rotational velocity of the pump decreases with increasing pressure differences. This leads to the following relation: q ( ∆p ) = q max – c loss ⋅ ∆p
(EQ 67)
Alternatively a flow-characteristic can be specified. q ( ∆p ) = f (∆p,pump activation) -
Cavitation on the suction side. If the relative pressure on the suction side of the pump approaches -1 bar (absolute pressure 0 bar), the flow approaches to zero. This relation is modeled by a exponential saturation function starting at a limit "edge" pressure and a second pressure at which 63% of the full flow are reached:
p
–p
edge ----------------------- p 63 – p edge q∗ = q 1 – e
•
(EQ 68)
(EQ 69)
Dynamic characteristic: t
– -n q τ ---------- = ---------- = 1 – e n max q max
(EQ 70)
When the pump is switched on, the full rotational speed (as well as the full flow) is not reached immediately, but it increases with an exponential saturation function. This function can be parametrized by the time constant τ Full at which 63% of the full flow is reached. After switching off the pump, the rotational speed (as well as the flow) decreases exponentially with a time constant τ Zero to be given. The rotation speed of the hydraulic pump is a relative speed because it is meassured from the voltage ratio of the pump ( current voltage ⁄ maximal voltage ). It is not possible for the hyrdaulic model to calculate a absolut pump speed.
Usually brake ECUs measure the return voltage generated by the pump to detect pump engine faults. As the pump is a volumetric pump, its rotational speed is approximately proportional to the flow (which is evaluated by the equation or tables above). The model evaluates this voltage as follows: q U Ret = ----------U genVmax q max
(EQ 71)
with U genVmax q max
Maximum generated return voltage of the pump (at a pressure difference of 0 bar with no cavitation on the suction side). Flow at pressure difference 0 bar.
Alternatively a characteristic can be specified.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
166 Brake System HydESP
All Paramaters specified for the hydraulic pump apply to a single brake cricuit (e. g. q max applies per cirquit and is not the total flow of both cirquits). But both cirquits are parametized with the same parameter (they are symetrical).
Pump.qMax Optional instead of Pump.Flow.mapping. Maximum delivery of pump. At 0 bar pressure 3 difference [ cm ⁄ ( s ⋅ bar ) ] . Example
Pump.qMax = 5.0
Pump.cLoss Optional instead of Pump.Flow.mapping. Loss Coefficient of pump. With increase of ∆p delivery efficiency will decrease. Small Pump.cLoss values are equivalent to a high efficiency 3 characteristic of the pump [ cm ⁄ ( s ⋅ bar ) ] . Example
Pump.cLoss = 0.01
Pump.Flow.mapping.Kind Optional. Determines the type of input for the characteristic Pump.Flow.mapping.: Pump.Flow.mapping.Kind
Description
Standard
Default. One dimensional input characteristic depending on activation signal expected.
PressureSignal
Two dimensional input characteristic depending an activation signal and pressure difference expected.
Example
Pump.Flow.mapping.Kind = PressureSignal
To obtain reasonable results for a hydraulic pump (flow depends on activation signal/supply voltage and pressure difference) the parameter Pump.Flow.mapping.Kind should be set to ‘PressureSignal’.
Pump.Flow.mapping Optional instead of Pump.qMax and Pump.cLoss. This characteristic holds lines with the pressure difference at the hydraulic pump [bar] the activation of the pump [0..1] and the resulting 3 delivery flow [ cm ⁄ s ] of the pump. It is assumed that Pump.Flow.mapping.Kind is set to ‘PressureSignal’! . Syntax
CarMaker Reference Manual
Infofile table mapping with 3 columns
Version 2.1.6
167 Brake System HydESP
Example
Pump.Flow.mapping: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
0.0 0.25 0.5 1.0 0.0 0.25 0.5 1.0 0.0 0.25 0.5 1.0 0.0 0.25 0.5 1.0
0.0 6.4 6.8 7.0 0.0 5.3 6.1 6.6 0.0 4.0 5.3 6.3 0.0 1.8 3.6 5.1
Pump.Full Time constant τ Full when Pump is accelerating [s]. See (EQ 70). Example
Pump.Full = 0.1
Pump.Zero Time constant τ Zero when pump is deccelerating [s]. See (EQ 70). Example
Pump.Zero = 0.1
Pump.pEdge Only for pressures higher than p edge the Hydraulic pump works. Below p edge no fluid is pumped [bar]. Example
Pump.pEdge = -0.8
Pump.p63Prcnt At this pressure the pump operates at 63% of its full delivery capacity [bar]. Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
Pump.p63Prcnt = -0.5
Version 2.1.6
168 Brake System HydESP
Pump.genVmax Optional. Generated voltage of the pump at maximum rotational speed [V], see (EQ 71). Default: 8.0 V. Example
9.6.11
Pump.genVmax = 8.0
Valves and Connecting Lines in General Pipe
Valve
dPipe
p1, V1
Pipe
p2, V2
dValve
Q
Q
l
Figure 9.15: Modeling of hydraulic valves and connecting lines
Applied to this model is that a valve with its corresponding pipe is always situated between two hydraulic reservoirs with the state variables pressure and volume. The pressure difference ∆p = p 1 – p 2
(EQ 72)
Q = Q Pipe = Q Valve = f (∆p,...)
(EQ 73)
is tried to be equalized by a flow
through the pipe and the valve aperture. The complete pressure difference ∆p calculates to: ∆p = ∆p Valve + ∆p Pipe
(EQ 74)
To solve this equation relations for the pressure portions of the flow of ∆p Valve and ∆p Pipe are needed: It is assumed that the flow through the pipe is always laminar and through the valve aperture always turbulent. •
Laminar flow through a pipe: 2
Ad Pipe Q Pipe = ---------------- ∆p = q Pipe ∆p 32lρν
(EQ 75)
with ∆p A d ρ ν q Pipe
CarMaker Reference Manual
pressure gradient (= pin- pout) cross section area of the pipe diameter pipe density kinematic viscosity flow coefficient pipe
Version 2.1.6
169 Brake System HydESP
q Pipe can be calculated out of geometrical data using the following equation: 4
πd Pipe q Pipe = ----------------128lρν
(EQ 76)
The value of the parameter q Pipe has to be specified in: 3
3
m cm –6 [ q Pipe ] = --------------- = 10 ⋅ --------------s ⋅ bar s ⋅ bar •
(EQ 77)
Turbulent flow through a valve: 2 Q Valve = αA --- ∆p ⋅ sgn ∆p = q Valve ρ
∆p ⋅ sgn ∆p
(EQ 78)
with ∆p α A ρ q Valve
pressure gradient (= pin- pout) coefficient depending on the geometry of the aperture aperture area density flow coefficient valve aperture
q Valve can be calculated out of geometrical data using the following equation: 2
πd Valve 2 q Valve = α ----------------- --4 ρ
(EQ 79)
The value of the parameter q Valve has to be specified in: 3
3
m cm –6 [ q Valve ] = --------------- = 10 ⋅ --------------s bar s bar
(EQ 80)
Combining (EQ 73), (EQ 74), (EQ 75) and (EQ 78) leads to: Q 2 Q ∆p ( Q ) = -------------- + ---------- q Valve q Pipe
(EQ 81)
This relation between pressure difference and flow is valid for all modeled valves. Variations are characterized through q Valve and q Pipe .
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
170 Brake System HydESP
9.6.12
Solenoid valves The solenoid valves are controlled by the power of the magnetic field through the magnetic coils. Basically two different kind of solenoid valves are distinguished: •
Digital valves have activation signals that normally either completely open (full activation) or completely close (zero activation) a valve.
•
Proportional valves also have activation signals other than zero or full activation. An activation between zero and full may lead to intermediate opening states of the valve. SignalConditioning
analog RawSignal
MeasureSignal
CAL Activation Signal
MeasureSignal
Magnetic
Sensor
or digital Activation Signal (0 or 1)
HydESP Hydraulic Model
Target Valve Position HydESP Brake Interface
SignalAcquisition
Valve Dynamics ⇒ actual valve pos.
Flow Rate through Valve
t➞∞
f (act,∆p)
f ( ∆p )
f (∆p,...)
∆p: Pressure Difference at Valve p1 = f ( V 1 ) p2 = f ( V 2 )
∆p = p 1 – p 2
Integration of Flow V 1 = V 1 – ∫ Q ( 1 ⇒ 2 ) dt V 2 = V 2 + ∫ Q ( 1 ⇒ 2 ) dt
Figure 9.16: From detection to calculation of a hydraulic valve
The interface between the ECU and the simulated hydraulic block is at the magnetic coil. Figure 9.16 shows the process from sensing the valve position up to the calculation of the volume transferred through the valve and the connected pipe. There are two possibilities for the acquisition of the valve activation signals. For proportional valves the acquiring method has to be analog in order to capture intermediate valve positions. A raw signal captured from the sensor is converted by a calibration function into the measure signal (typically it is the voltage output signal of a hall sensor). After that the measure signal has to be converted into a standardized valve activation signal. This is the input signal for each solenoid valve to the brake interface. The same standardized activation signal is delivered from the digital valve acquisition. It is the digital signal itself which is characterized by the states zero and one. An alternative method for capturing digital valves is to use the analog signal acquisition. The signal conditioning part is used to define a threshold for valve activity. After the activation signal of each valve is stored in the brake interface structure the calculation process within the brake model can be initiated. The intermediate state (without dynamics, t ➞ ∞) of a proportional valve is a function of the activation signal and the pressure difference of the valve. This is called the target valve position. Because there is no pressure dependency for digital valves this function is a one to one relation of the activation signal.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
171 Brake System HydESP
The time response (so to speak when the target valve position is reached) is calculated by the valve dynamics function. The opening time and closing time for the valve can be specified. As well, the opening/closing times are functions of the pressure difference. The result is the standardized actual valve position. The actual valve position is input for the flow rate calculation of the valve/pipe system. In this context it is considered as a relative valve opening. The relative valve opening αrel [0..1] is defined as: q valve α rel = -------------------q valve, max
(EQ 82)
q valve, max is the maximum flow rate which is reached with a fully opened valve (actual valve position = 1). The calculation of the flow is done by (EQ 81) considering (EQ 82).
With the knowledge of the actual flow through the valve/pipe system the volume change of the two bounding reservoirs can be calculated by integration of flow. This is shown in Figure 9.16 at the lower part of the HydESP section. The pressure difference of the valve is a central part for the calculation. It can be positive or negative. Here, the pressure difference is defined to be positive if the input pressure is higher than the output pressure, with the following definitions of inputs and outputs:
CarMaker Reference Manual
valve
input side
output side
inlet valve
pressure side pump
wheel brake
outlet valve
wheel brake
low pressure accumulator
pilot valve
pressure side pump
master cylinder
suction valve
master cylinder
suction side pump
Version 2.1.6
172 Brake System HydESP
9.6.13
Proportional Solenoid Valves All solenoid valves can be proportional or digital valves. For the proportional valves a transfer mapping characteristic has to be specified to obtain the relative opening of the valve depending on the activation signal and the current pressure difference at the valve. A relative opening of 1 means that the valve is completely opened, 0 means completely closed. This is important because there are valves that are closed when activated (activation signal 1 results in a relative opening of 0), or opened when activated (activation signal 1 results in a relative opening of 1)
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
173 Brake System HydESP
Inlet_f.transfer.mapping.Kind Inlet_r.transfer.mapping.Kind Outlet_f.transfer.mapping.Kind Outlet_r.transfer.mapping.Kind PV.transfer.mapping.Kind SV.transfer.mapping.Kind Optional. Determines the Inlet_.transfer.mapping.:
type
of
input
fo r
the
characteristic
.transfer.mapping.Kind
Description
Standard
Default. One dimensional input characteristic depending on activation signal expected.
PressureSignal
Two dimensional input characteristic depending an activation signal and pressure difference expected.
Inlet_f.transfer.mapping: Inlet_r.transfer.mapping: Outlet_f.transfer.mapping: Outlet_r.transfer.mapping: PV.transfer.mapping: SV.transfer.mapping: Optional. Used to calculate the target valve position of the valve. See Figure 9.16. Syntax depending on Inlet_.transfer.mapping.Kind (see above): •
Standard:
Characteristic specifying values for relative valve opening [0..1] depending on valve activation signal [0..1].. Syntax
Infofile table mapping with 2 columns
Example
Inlet_.transfer.mapping: 0.0 1.0 0.5 0.6 1.0 1.0
•
PressureSignal: Characteristic specifying values for relative valve opening [0..1] depending on pressure difference [bar] and valve activation signal [0..1].
Syntax
Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
Infofile table mapping with 3 columns
Inlet_f.transfer.mapping.Kind = PressureSignal Inlet_f.transfer.mapping: 0.0 0.3 1.0 0.0 0.5 0.0 100 0.5 1.0 100 0.8 0.0
Version 2.1.6
174 Brake System HydESP
9.6.14
Dynamic Solenoid Valves All solenoid valves no matter if they are proportional or digital can have a different dynamic behavior depending on the current pressure difference at the valve. At higher pressures valves usually open faster and close slower. This behavior is specified with the following parameters:
Inlet_f.deltaT.mapping: Inlet_r.deltaT.mapping: Outlet_f.deltaT.mapping: Outlet_r.deltaT.mapping: PV.deltaT.mapping: SV.deltaT.mapping: Optional. Used to calculate valve dynamics and the actual valve position. Characteristic specifying values for opening time [s] and closing time [s] of the valve depending on the pressure difference at the valve [bar]. The durations specify the time for open a completely closed valve and vice versa. Syntax
Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
Infofile table mapping with 3 columns IInlet_f.deltaT.mapping: 100 0.002 200 0.001 0 0.01
0.01 0.01 0.01
Version 2.1.6
175 Brake System HydESP
9.6.15
Inlet Valves with check valve The inlet valve (or supply valve) is situated before the wheel brake. A check valve is positioned parallel to the inlet valve. It is opened if the pressure in the wheel brake becomes higher than on the inlet side. When not driven, inlet valves are opened (flow through valve is possible). Usually, inlet valves are digital or proportional 2/2-valves. But there are also systems with valves that have a variable aperture. Those valves have a small and a big aperture, the switching between them is done by a mechanical system depending on the pressure difference: aperture size
lower threshold
upper threshold
big
small
p Sm2Gr
p Gr2Sm
∆p
Figure 9.17: Switching between different aperture sizes
pressure difference
switch to
lower than lower threshold
big aperture
higher than upper threshold
small aperture
For the following parameters applies: ‘f’ means front or ‘r’ means rear.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
176 Brake System HydESP
For valves with unswitched apertures:
Inlet_f.qOri Inlet_r.qOri Flow coefficient of valve without switched apertures (‘Ori’ = Orifice = Aperture) 3 [ cm ⁄ ( s ⋅ bar ) ] . Example
Inlet_f.qOri = 4.0
For valves with switched apertures:
Inlet_f.qOriGr Inlet_r.qOriGr Flow coefficient of valve when switched to big aperture (‘Ori’ = Orifice = Aperture) 3 [ cm ⁄ ( s ⋅ bar ) ] . Example
Inlet_f.qOriGr = 4.0
Inlet_f.qOriSm Inlet_r.qOriSm Flow coefficient of valve when switched to small aperture (‘Ori’ = Orifice = Aperture) 3 [ cm ⁄ ( s ⋅ bar ) ] . Example
Inlet_f.qOriGr = 2.8
Inlet_f.pSm2Gr Inlet_r.pSm2Gr Limit pressure below which valve switches from “small” to “big” aperture [bar]. See Figure 9.17. Example
Inlet_f.pSm2Gr = 14.0
Inlet_f.pGr2Sm Inlet_r.pGr2Sm Limit pressure above which valve switches from “big” to “small” aperture [bar]. See Figure 9.17. Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
Inlet_f.pGr2Sm = 18.0
Version 2.1.6
177 Brake System HydESP
For all inlet valves:
Inlet_f.qPipe Inlet_r.qPipe 3
Optional. Overall flow coefficient of pipe in front and behind the valve [ cm ⁄ ( s ⋅ bar ) ] . Default: 106. Example
Inlet_f.qPipe = 10000
Inlet check valves:
InCheckV_f.qOri InCheckV_r.qOri Flow coefficient of check valve situated beside inlet valve (‘Ori’ = Orifice = Aperture) 3 [ cm ⁄ ( s ⋅ bar ) ] . Example
InCheckV_f.qOri = 6.0
InCheckV_f.qPipe InCheckV_r.qPipe 3
Optional. Overall flow coefficient of pipe of check valve [ cm ⁄ ( s ⋅ bar ) ] . Usually this is the same as Inlet_.qPipe. Default: 106. Example
InCheckV_f.qPipe = 20000
Outlet Valves The outlet valves (or: discharge valves) are situated behind the wheel brake. When not driven, the outlet valves are closed.
Outlet_f.qOri Outlet_r.qOri 3
Flow coefficient of outlet valve (‘Ori’ = Orifice = Aperture) [ cm ⁄ ( s ⋅ bar ) ] . Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
Outlet_f.qOri = 4.0
Version 2.1.6
178 Brake System HydESP
Outlet_f.qPipe Outlet_r.qPipe 3
Optional. Overall flow coefficient of pipe before and after the outlet valve [ cm ⁄ ( s ⋅ bar ) ] . Default: 106. Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
Outlet_f.qPipe = 100000
Version 2.1.6
179 Brake System HydESP
9.6.16
Pilot valve with check valve and pressure limiting valve The pilot valves are used to separate the brake circuit from the master cylinder. This allows the system autonomously to generate a brake pressure in the circuit. When not driven, the pilot valves are open. A check valve is positioned parallel to the pilot valve. It opens if the pressure in the master cylinder is higher than the one in the circuit. A pressure limiting valve is positioned parallel to the pilot valve as well. It opens if the pressure in the brake circuit is higher than the pressure limit. In this case, the flow is calculated as follows: Q PLim = q PLimValve ⋅
∆p – p Limit ⋅ sgn ∆p
(EQ 83)
The pressure limiting valve is then modeled by the relationship 2 Q Q ∆p ( Q PLim ) = p Open + ------------------------ + --------------------- q PLimValve q PLimPipe
(EQ 84)
Pure ABS systems don’t have pilot valves. For ABS systems use a relatively high value for the flow coefficient. Be careful with too high values and check numerical stability.
PV.qOri 3
Flow coefficient of pilot valve (‘Ori’ = Orifice = Aperture) [ cm ⁄ ( s ⋅ bar ) ] . Example
PV.qOri = 5.0
PV.qPipe 3
Optional. Overall flow coefficient of pipe before and after the pilot valve [ cm ⁄ ( s ⋅ bar ) ] . Default: 106. Example
PV.qPipe = 20000
PLim.qOri 3
Flow coefficient of pressure limiting valve (‘Ori’ = Orifice = Aperture) [ cm ⁄ ( s ⋅ bar ) ] . Example
PLim.qOri = 5.0
PLim.qPipe Optional. Overall flow coefficient of pipe before and after the pressure limiting valve 3 [ cm ⁄ ( s ⋅ bar ) ] . Usually set to the same value as PV.qPipe. Default: 106. Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
PLim.qPipe = 20000
Version 2.1.6
180 Brake System HydESP
PLim.pOpen At a pressure difference superior to PLim.pOpen, the pressure limiting valve opens [bar]. Example
PLim.pOpen = 180.0
PVcheckV.qOri 3
Flow coefficient of check valve (‘Ori’ = Orifice = Aperture) [ cm ⁄ ( s ⋅ bar ) ] . Example
PVcheckV.qOri = 5.0
PVcheckV.qPipe 3
Optional. Overall flow coefficient of pipe before and after the check valve [ cm ⁄ ( s ⋅ bar ) ] . Usually set to the same value as PV.qPipe. Default:106. Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
PVcheckV.qPipe = 20000
Version 2.1.6
181 Brake System HydESP
9.6.17
Suction valve In case of an autonomous brake pressure generation, this valve enables the hydraulic pump to take liquid out of the master cylinder. When not driven, they are closed. The suction valve is situated between the master cylinder and the low pressure side of the hydraulic pump. Pure ABS systems don have suction valves. For ABS systems use a relatively high value for the flow coefficient. Be careful with too high values and check numerical stability.
SV.qOri 3
Flow coefficient of suction valve (‘Ori’ = Orifice = Aperture) [ cm ⁄ ( s ⋅ bar ) ] . Example
SV.qOri = 10.0
SV.qPipe 3
Optional. Overall flow coefficient of pipe before and after the suction valve [ cm ⁄ ( s ⋅ bar ) ] . Default: 106. Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
SV.qPipe = 20000
Version 2.1.6
182 Brake System HydESP
9.6.18
Check Valve of the Low Pressure Accumulator This valve is situated between the low pressure accumulator and the low pressure side of the hydraulic pump. The purpose of this valve is to inhibit the flow trough the suction valve to the low pressure accumulator. It opens when the pressure on the low pressure accumulator side is higher then the one on the hydraulic pump side.
LPAcheckV.qOri Flow coefficient of low pressure accumulator check valve (‘Ori’ = Orifice = Aperture) 3 [ cm ⁄ ( s ⋅ bar ) ] . Example
LPAcheckV.qOri = 6.0
LPAcheckV.qPipe Optional. Overall flow coefficient of pipe before and after the low pressure accumulator 3 check valve [ cm ⁄ ( s ⋅ bar ) ] . Default: 106. Example
LPAcheckV.qPipe = 20000
Temperature of the Brake Fluid In consequence of a temperature change of the hydraulic fluid the mass density ρ and the kinematic viscosity ν of the fluid change as well. Apparently the equations (EQ 75) and (EQ 78) show the following relations: 1 1 q valve ∼ ------- and q pipe ∼ ------ . ρν ρ
(EQ 85)
This means that parameter values for q valve and q pipe specified in the hydraulic dataset are only valid for a specific reference temperature T Ref which usually equals the ’normal’ operation temperature.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
183 Brake System HydESP
Investigations about the significance of the relations ρ ( T ) and ν ( T ) point out clearly that there is a negligible temperature influence of the mass density and a significant temperature dependence of the kinematic viscosity. This means that a change of temperature is only relevant for the flow coefficients of the hydraulic pipes.
Figure 9.19: Change of kinematic viscosity and mass density of hydraulic fluid as a function of temperature
The flow parameters of the lines are specified by the user for a specific reference temperature. If the brake should operate at a temperature that differs from the reference temperature, the operating temperature can be changed to an alternative value (input from brake interface). The flow characteristics are then adapted automatically by the brake model with the given characteristics for the hydraulic fluid. In order to parametrize the properties of the brake fluid, kinematic viscosities for two different temperatures have to be given. Those two points are then used by the model to determine the coefficients in its viscosity function. The hydraulic model uses the following approach to scale the flow coefficients to the specific operating temperature. A factor ν Ref nf = -------νT
(EQ 86)
with nf v Ref νT
CarMaker Reference Manual
Scaling factor, Kinematic viscosity of brake fluid at reference temperature, Kinematic viscosity of brake fluid at the specified operating temperature of the brake,
Version 2.1.6
184 Brake System HydESP
is used to recalculate the flow coefficients to ν Ref q pipe, T = nf ⋅ q pipe = --------- ⋅ q pipe νT
(EQ 87)
To calculate the kinematic viscosities the following approach is used, log ( log ν ) = c ⋅ T + k ,
(EQ 88)
with the coefficients c, k of the linear equation on the right side: ( log ( log ν 2 ) ) – ( log ( log ν 1 ) ) c = ----------------------------------------------------------------------T2 – T1
k = ( log ( log ν 1 ) ) – c ⋅ T 1 .
(EQ 89)
The reference kinematic viscosity is the viscosity according to (EQ 88) for the temperature T Ref :
ν Ref = 10
10
c ⋅ T Ref + k
.
(EQ 90)
Fluid.Ref.Temp Optional. Reference temperature. Temperature of the hydraulic fluid at which the specified flow coefficients are valid. Dimension: K. Default: no default value, temperature dependency of the brake fluid is switched on by specifying this parameter. Fluid.Ref.Temp = 293 If the parameter Fluid.Ref.Temp is specified the following 4 parameters are mandatory.
The viscosity of the brake liquid has to be indicated for two temperatures:
Fluid.P1.Temp Temperature T 1 to determine linear equation according to (EQ 88) [K]. Example
Fluid.P1.Temp = 233
Fluid.P1.nue Viscosity ν 1 to determine linear equation according to (EQ 88) [mm2/s]. Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
Fluid.P1.nue = 1150
Version 2.1.6
185 Brake System HydESP
Fluid.P2.Temp Temperature T 2 to determine linear equation according to (EQ 88) [K]. Example
Fluid.P2.Temp = 273
Fluid.P2.nue Viscosity ν 2 to determine linear equation according to (EQ 88) [mm2/s]. Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
Fluid.P2.nue = 40
Version 2.1.6
186 Brake System HydESP
9.6.19
User Accessible Quantities for Brake Module ‘HydESP’ Name
Unit
Info
Brake.HydESP.Att_0.p
bar
Pressure of Attenuator 0
Brake.HydESP.Att_1.p
bar
Pressure of Attenuator 1
Brake.HydESP.LPA_0.p
bar
Pressure of low pressure accumulator 0
Brake.HydESP.LPA_1.p
bar
Pressure of low pressure accumulator 1
Brake.HydESP.SuppL_0.p
bar
Pressure of supply line 0
Brake.HydESP.Cyl_p_FL
bar
Pressure of brake cylinder front left
Brake.HydESP.Cyl_p_FR
bar
Pressure of brake cylinder front right
Brake.HydESP.Cyl_p_RL
bar
Pressure of brake cylinder rear left
Brake.HydESP.Cyl_p_RR
bar
Pressure of brake cylinder rear right
m
3
Volume of brake cylinder front left
m
3
Volume of brake cylinder front righ
m
3
Volume of brake cylinder rear left
Brake.HydESP.Cyl_v_RR
m
3
Volume of brake cylinder rear right
Brake.HydESP.SuppL_1.p
bar
Pressure of supply line 1
Brake.HydESP.nPump
1/s
Rotation speed of hydraulic pump engine
Brake.HydESP.qIN_FL
m ⁄s
Brake.HydESP.Cyl_v_FL Brake.HydESP.Cyl_v_FR Brake.HydESP.Cyl_v_RL
Brake.HydESP.qIN_FR Brake.HydESP.qIN_RL
3
Volume flow through inlet valve front left
3
Volume flow through inlet valve front right
3
Volume flow through inlet valve rear left
3
m ⁄s m ⁄s
Brake.HydESP.qIN_RR
m ⁄s
Volume flow through inlet valve rear right
Brake.HydESP.qOUT_FL
m ⁄s
3
Volume flow through outlet valve front left
3
Volume flow through outlet valve front right
3
Volume flow through outlet valve rear left
3
Volume flow through outlet valve rear right
Brake.HydESP.qOUT_FR Brake.HydESP.qOUT_RL
m ⁄s m ⁄s
Brake.HydESP.qOUT_RR
m ⁄s
Brake.HydESP.qPV_0
m ⁄s
3
Volume flow through pilot valve 0 see section ’CircuitConfig’
Brake.HydESP.qPV_1
m ⁄s
3
Volume flow through pilot valve 1 see section ’CircuitConfig’
Brake.HydESP.qPu_0
m ⁄s
3
Volume flow through hydraulic pump 0
3
Volume flow through hydraulic pump 1
Brake.HydESP.qPu_1
m ⁄s
Brake.HydESP.qSV_0
m ⁄s
3
Volume flow through suction valve 0
3
Volume flow through suction valve 1
Brake.HydESP.qSV_1
CarMaker Reference Manual
m ⁄s
Version 2.1.6
187 Brake System HydESP
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
188
Overview
Chapter 10
Tire
10.1
Overview The quality of a vehicle dynamics simulation is heavily influenced by the capabilities of the tire model. This chapter describes the basic outline of tire models used with CarMaker.
Axis system for the tire-road contact point
z x y
C
Fr2 z x y
z x
P
FrH Fz
y
Fr0
Figure 10.1: Tire Axis system FrH
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
189
Overview
There are two points of interest concerning a tire model, the wheel center C and the tireroad contact point P. The axis system Fr2 which origins in C is explained in section 1.2 ’CarMaker Axis Systems’. Furthermore there is a axis system FrH which has its origin in the tire-road contact point. FrH is defined as follows: •
Rules apply to any tire of the vehicle
•
(O) is located on the intersecting line of the tire vertical plane and the tangential plane of the road. It is defined as the point of the shortest distance min ( CP ) on the intersecting line.
•
(X) points in forward direction of the intersecting line between tire vertical plane and tangential plane of the road.
•
(Y) points to the left side rectangular to (X) in the tangential plane of the road.
•
(Z) points in direction of the normal vector of the tangential plane of the road (mathematically: ( X ) × ( Y ) ).
CarMaker supports tire models formulated for the tire-road contact point. The duty of the tire model is to calculate the tire response forces and torques. Basically the tire forces and torques are functions of: F, T = f ( F z, α, s, γ , µ, ... )
(EQ 91)
with Fz α s γ µ
CarMaker Reference Manual
Normal force in tire contact point Side slip angle Longitudinal slip Camber angle Friction coefficient between tire and road
Version 2.1.6
Tire
190
Overview
10.1.1
Tire Interface all parameters are related to FrH
Inputs
v
Outputs
(P)
v Belt
F
(P)
(P)
Fz
Tire Model
γ µ
T
(P)
(P)
Figure 10.2: Structure of Tire Interface
A CarMaker tire model is provided from the vehicle model with the inputs depicted in Figure 10.2. Beside the ones explained with Figure 10.1 they are: v
(P)
v Belt
Velocity vector in the tire-road contact point Velocity of the tire belt in the tire-road contact point
The outputs of the tire model are according to Figure 10.1: (P)
F (P) T
CarMaker Reference Manual
Tire forces in the tire-road contact point Torques in the tire-road contact point
Version 2.1.6
Tire
191
Overview
10.1.2
Tire load (normal force) The tire load is calculated by the vehicle model and is direct input to the tire model. This section explains how the tire normal force is calculated. vertical damping
C(t)
vertical stiffness
CP ( t )
l(t)
R0
Fz P ( t ) P0
Figure 10.3: Calculation of tire normal load
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
192
Overview
10.1.3
Tire Model Computations The job of the tire model is to deduce the parameters of (EQ 91) out of the inputs of the tire interface. This means that the parameters side slip angle and longitudinal slip, which are not specified directly, have to be calculated by the tire model.This has to be done by a relation: α, s = f ( v
(P)
, v Belt )
(EQ 92)
The computation of internal models is explained in the sections below corresponding to the tire models offered by CarMaker.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
193
General Tire Parameters
10.2
General Tire Parameters The parameters explained here apply to (various) tire models. All tire parameters are stored in a separate tire date file.
General
FileIdent = CarMaker-Tire-* The first parameter has to be the FileIdent parameters which specifies the type and version of tire model to be used. See chapter 1.6.2 for details. FileIdent
Version
Description
RTTire
2,3
RealTime version of IPG-TIRE
MF52
3
Pacejka’s Magic Formula
Example
CarMaker-Tire-RTTire 3
FileCreator =
Comment
Optional. String containing formless informations about the file creator.
Description:
Text
Description contains formal informations of tire details, e. g. tire dimensions, inflation pressure, conditions of measurement, etc.
Carrier.mass = Carrier.I =
Mass InertiaTensor
Optional. Part in wheel carrier mass. The support for this parameters depends on the vehicle model. The place of this body is taken from the vehicle parameter set.
Wheel.mass = Wheel.I =
Mass InertiaTensor
Optional. Part in wheel mass. The support for this parameters depends on the vehicle model. The place of this body is taken from the vehicle parameter set.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
194
Tire Model RT-Tire
10.3
Tire Model RT-Tire Tire Model RT-Tire is a modified version of IPG-TIRE. This version is optimized for computation speed and designed for using in realtime systems.
Visualization
AspectRatio Optional. Represents ratio between rim radius and witdth [-].
NomWidth Optional. Nomimal width of the tire [m].
NomRadius Optional. Nominal radius of tire used for the animation tool IPG-MOVIE [m].
RimRadius Optional. Nominal radius of rim used for the animation tool IPG-MOVIE [m].
FLoadMax Optional. Maximum animated load force of tire. Used to scale the tire force vectors in the animation tool IPG-MOVIE [N]. Model Ident
muRoad Friction conditions during tire measurement [-].
BinFName File name with relative path to Data/Tire directory. Tire force and torque mappings may be stored in a binary file located in this directory.
Kinematics and Load Force
KinRollRadius Kinematic tire radius (also known as static tire radius) [m].
Radial.Stiffness Radial/vertical stiffness of tire [N/m].
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
195
Tire Model RT-Tire
Radial.Damping Radial/vertical damping coefficient of tire [N/m/s].
Dynamics
LongFrc.Length SideFrc.Length AlignTrq.Length Relaxation lengths. [m]
Stand Still
vMinSlip vMinAlpha Optional. Boundary for switching between stand still model and normal computation [m/s].
StandStill.cLong = StandStill.cSide =
Stiffness Stiffness
Optional. Stiffness for stand stil model [-]. Additional Internal Parameters
LongFrc.Stiffness = SideFrc.Stiffness = AlignTrq.Stiffness =
Factor Factor Factor
Optional. Scaling factors[-].
InclinAngle2Alpha Optional. Camber influence to side slip angle. The actual camber value multiplied by this factor is added to the side slip angle value [-].
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
196
Tire Model RT-Tire
10.3.1 Roll Resistance
Rolling Resistance RollResist.Kind =
KindStr
The following roll resistance models are known: Torque of force influence based on Load or velocity.There KindStr are: KindStr
Description
TrqLoad
A torque along wheel spin axis, against rotation based on load force.
TrqVelocity
A torque along wheel spin axis, against rotation based on translation velocity.
FLoad
A force along FrH x axis, against translation based on load force.
FVelocity
A force along FrH x axis, against translation based on translation velocity.
To disable roll resistance write none or an empty string.
RollResist.Factor Kind dependent Factor. Input is scaled by Factor to get the roll resistance output [-].
10.3.2
Importing Tire Measurements The supported input file format is the Tydex format. The Tydex file can be imported by tireutil TydexFileName.tdx The following Tydex model parameters are supported:
ITVS = ITVD = ITRLLO = ITRLLA = ITSSCLO = ITSSCLA = ITRORETL =
CarMaker Reference Manual
RadialTireStiffness_N/m RadialDamping_N/m/s RelaxationLengthLong_m RelaxationLengthLateral_m StandStillCoeffLong StandStillCoeffLateral RollResistFactor_Trq/Load
Version 2.1.6
Tire
197
Tire Model Magic Formula
10.4
Tire Model Magic Formula
10.4.1
The basics of Magic Formula When possible “original” Pacejka’s variable and parameter names are used. For background information, you can use publications on Pacjeka tire modeling, magic formula or in Hans B. Pacejka book “Tyre and Vehicle Dynamics” published in november 2002. The general form of the formula reads: y ( x ) = D sin [ C atan { Bx – E ( Bx – atan Bx ) } ]
(EQ 93)
with Y ( X ) = y ( x ) + SV x = X + SH
where: Y ( X ) : could be either F x or F y or possibly M z (in this case the sine function is replaced by a cosine function.
The variables represents as follows: B : stiffness factor C : shape factor D : peak value E : curvature factor S H : horizontal shift S V : vertical shift
y
Y
xm SH
D
ya x X
SV
atan(BCD) Figure 10.4: Curve produced by the original sine version of the Magic Formula
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
198
Tire Model Magic Formula
The Magic Formula y ( x ) typically produces a curve that passes through the origin x = y = 0 , reaches a maximum and tends to a horizontal asymptote. To allow the curve to have an offset with respect to origin, two parameters for shifting ( S H and S V )have been introduced The MagicFormula model equation contains non-dimensional parameters p , q , r and s and additional scaling factors λ . These parameters are used to parametrize a special tire behavior. The effect of having a tire with different nominal load can be approximated by using a scaling factor: ′
F zo = λ Fzo F zo
(EQ 94)
Further, we introduce the normalized change in vertical load ′
F z – F zo d f z = -----------------′ F zo
CarMaker Reference Manual
(EQ 95)
Version 2.1.6
Tire
199
Tire Model Magic Formula
10.4.2 General
Tire Description AdamsPropertyFile =
PropertyFile
Optional. Link to an ADAMS® tire property file. Its path is relative to directory Data/Tire. Supported Formats: MF_05 Caution. All parameters listed below can be used to redefine a tire property. This means parameters from AdamsPropertyFile have lower priority than or will be overwritten by parameters given in the tire data set directly. This feature is very useful if you are tuning a measured tire data set.
Dimensions and Visualization
Range.FZMAX Optional. Maximum load force of tire. Used to scale the tire force vectors in the animation tool IPG-MOVIE. If this parameter is missing the value from 2*Vertical.FNOMIN is used [N].
Dim.UNLOADED_RADIUS Free tire radius also used for the animation tool IPG-MOVIE [m].
Dim.WIDTH Tire width also used for the animation tool IPG-MOVIE [m].
Dim.RIM_RADIUS Rim radius also used for the animation tool IPG-MOVIE [m].
Dim.RIM_WIDTH Rim width also used for the animation tool IPG-MOVIE [m].
Vertical.VERTICAL_STIFFNESS Radial/vertical stiffness of tire [N/m].
Vertical.VERTICAL_DAMPING Radial/vertical damping coefficient of tire [N/m/s].
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
200
Tire Model Magic Formula
10.4.3 Scale
Scale factors Scale.LFZ0 Optional. Scale factor of nominal load [-]. Default: 1.
Scale.LCX Optional. Scale factor of F x shape factor [-]. Default: 1.
Scale.LMUX Optional. Scale factor of F x peak friction coefficient [-]. Default: 1.
Scale.LEX Optional. Scale factor of F x curvature factor [-]. Default: 1.
Scale.LKX Optional. Scale factor of F x slip stiffness [-]. Default: 1.
Scale.LHX Optional. Scale factor of F x horizontal shift [-]. Default: 1.
Scale.LVX Optional. Scale factor of F x vertical shift [-]. Default: 1.
Scale.LGAX Optional. Scale factor of camber for F x [-].Default: 1.
Scale.LCY Optional. Scale factor of F y shape factor [-]. Default: 1.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
201
Tire Model Magic Formula
Scale.LMUY Optional. Scale factor of F y peak friction coefficient [-]. Default: 1.
Scale.LEY Optional. Scale factor of F y curvature factor [-]. Default: 1.
Scale.LKY Optional. Scale factor of F y cornering stiffness [-]. Default: 1.
Scale.LHY Optional. Scale factor of F y horizontal shift [-]. Default: 1.
Scale.LVY Optional. Scale factor of F y vertical shift [-]. Default: 1.
Scale.LGAY Optional. Scale factor of camber for F y [-].Default: 1.
Scale.LTR Optional. Scale factor of peak of pneumatic trail [-]. Default: 1.
Scale.LRES Optional. Scale factor for offset of residual torque [-]. Default: 1.
Scale.LGAZ Optional. Scale factor of camber for M z [-].Default: 1.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
202
Tire Model Magic Formula
Scale.LMX Optional. Scale factor of overturning couple [-]. Default: 1.
Scale.LVMX Optional. Scale factor of M x vertical shift [-]. Default: 1.
Scale.LMY Optional. Scale factor of rolling resistance torque [-]. Default: 1.
Scale.LXAL Optional. Scale factor of α influence on F x [-]. Default: 1.
Scale.LYKA Optional. Scale factor of κ influence on F y [-]. Default: 1.
Scale.LVYKA Optional. Scale factor of κ induced F y [-]. Default: 1.
Scale.LS Optional. Scale factor of moment arm of F x [-]. Default: 1.
Scale.LSGKP Optional. Scale factor of relaxation length of F x [-]. Default: 1.
Scale.LSGAL Optional. Scale factor of relaxation length of F y [-]. Default: 1.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
203
Tire Model Magic Formula
Scale.LGYR Optional. Scale factor of gyroscopic torque [-]. Default: 1. Example
A l l p a ra m e t e r s a r e t a ke n f r o m t h e r e fe r e n c e d A DA M S ® t i r e p r o p e r t y f i l e DT_Pacejca.tir, in the directory Data/Tire/Pacejka. The vertical stiffness from the referenced file is overwritten: The value 400000 N/m is used instead. FileIdent =CarMaker-Tire-MF52 2 Description: ADAMS Pacejka parameter set AdamsPropertyFile =Pacejka/DT_Pacejka.tir Vertical.VERTICAL_STIFFNESS = 400000
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
204
Tire Model Magic Formula
10.4.4
Effective tire rolling radius The effective rolling radius is defined for a wheel the tire of which is uniform and rolls freely at constant speed over an even horizontal surface.It reads: V R e = ------x Ω
R0
(EQ 96)
Ω Vx
C
Re
S
Figure 10.5: Effective rolling radius
In general the effective rolling radius will change with tire deflection ρ . Assuming the tire has a constant vertical stiffness C z , the deflection is calculated with: F ρ = -----zCz
(EQ 97)
The effective rolling radius is estimated by the Magic Formula (A3.7) which reads:
Effective rolling radius
R e = R 0 – ρ Fz0 ( Fρ d + D atan ( Bρ d ) )
(EQ 98)
F z0 ρ Fz0 = ------Cz
(EQ 99)
ρ ρ d = --------ρ Fz0
(EQ 100)
Vertical.BREFF Low load stiffness of effective rolling radius [-].
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
205
Tire Model Magic Formula
Vertical.DREFF Peak value of effective rolling radius [-].
Vertical.FREFF High load stiffness of effective rolling radius [-].
Vertical.FNOMIN Nominal wheel load [N].
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
206
Tire Model Magic Formula
10.4.5
Slip computation
VCx VCy
Vsx α Vsy
V
VS Figure 10.6: Slip computation
The longitudinal slip speed is defined as: V sx = V Cx – ΩR e
(EQ 101)
which results in a definition of longitudinal slip: V sx κ = – --------V Cx
(EQ 102)
V sy = V y
(EQ 103)
The lateral slip speed is defined as:
which results in a definition of lateral slip: V sy tan α = -----------V Cx
(EQ 104)
V sy α = atan -----------V Cx
(EQ 105)
V r = Re Ω
(EQ 106)
and a definition of side slip angle:
The rolling speed becomes:
In case the complete model including transient properties is used, the transient tire quanti′ ′ ties κ and α (see (EQ 194), (EQ 195)) are used instead of the wheel slip quantities κ and α.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
207
Tire Model Magic Formula
10.4.6
Longitudinal force (pure longitudinal slip): F xo = D x sin [ C x atan { B x κ x – E x ( B x κ x – atan ( B x κ x ) ) } ] + S Vx
(EQ 107)
κ x = κ + S Hx
(EQ 108)
C x = p Cx1 ⋅ λ Cx
( > 0)
(EQ 109)
( > 0)
Dx = µx ⋅ Fz ⋅ ζ1 *
µ x = ( p Dx1 + p Dx2 d f z ) ⋅ λ µx
(EQ 110)
( > 0)
(EQ 111)
2
E x = ( p Ex1 + p Ex2 d f z + p Ex3 d f z ) ⋅ { 1 – p Ex4 sgn ( κ x ) } ⋅ λ Ex ( ≤ 1 )
(EQ 112)
K xκ = F z ⋅ ( p Kx1 + p Kx2 d f z ) ⋅ exp ( p Kx3 d f z ) ⋅ λ Kxκ
(EQ 113)
K xk B x = ----------------------------( Cx Dx + εx )
(EQ 114)
S Hx = ( p Hx1 + p Hx2 d f z ) ⋅ λ Hx
(EQ 115) ′
S Vx = F z ⋅ ( p Vx1 + p Vx2 d f z ) ⋅ λ Vx ⋅ λ µx ⋅ ζ 1
(EQ 116)
At the request of several customers, who claim conformity to ADAMS implementation of MF TIRE 5.2, the tire model includes minor differences to the formulae above: •
The (EQ 111) changes to 2
µ x = ( p Dx1 + p Dx2 d f z ) ⋅ ( 1 – p Dx3 γ x ) ⋅ λ µx ( > 0 )
(EQ 117)
γ x = γ ⋅ λ γx
(EQ 118)
with
Longitudinal (pure slip)
′
•
In (EQ 116) λ µx instead of λ µx
•
in (EQ 110) and (EQ 116) ζ 1 is set to one.
used.
Long.PCX1 Shape factor for longitudinal force [-].
Long.PDX1 Longitudinal friction µ x at F znom [-].
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
208
Tire Model Magic Formula
Long.PDX2 Variation of friction µ x with load [-].
Long.PDX3 Variation of friction µ x with camber [-].
Long.PEX1 Longitudinal curvature at F znom [-].
Long.PEX2 Variation of curvature with load [-].
Long.PEX3 Variation of curvature with load squared [-].
Long.PEX4 Factor in curvature while driving [-].
Long.PKX1 Longitudinal slip stiffness at F znom [-].
Long.PKX2 Variation of slip stiffness with load [-].
Long.PKX3 Exponent in slip stiffness with load [-].
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
209
Tire Model Magic Formula
Long.PHX1 Horizontal shift at F znom [-].
Long.PHX2 Variation of shift with load [-].
Long.PVX1 Vertical shift at F znom [-].
Long.PVX2 Variation of shift with load [-].
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
210
Tire Model Magic Formula
10.4.7
Lateral force (pure side slip): F yo = D y sin [ C y atan { B y α y – E y ( B y α y – atan ( B y α y ) ) } ] + S Vy *
(EQ 119)
α y = α + S Hy
(EQ 120)
C y = p Cy1 ⋅ λ Cy
(EQ 121)
Dy = µy ⋅ Fz ⋅ ζ2
(EQ 122) *2
*
µ y = ( p Dy1 + p Dy2 d f z ) ⋅ ( 1 – p Dy3 γ ) ⋅ λ µy *
E y = ( p Ey1 + p Ey2 d f z ) ⋅ { 1 – ( p Ey3 + p Ey4 γ ) sgn ( α y ) } ⋅ λ Ey
(EQ 123)
( ≤ 1)
Fz ′ K yαo = p Ky1 F zo sin 2 atan -----------------⋅ λ Kyα ′ p Ky2 F zo *
(EQ 124)
(EQ 125)
2
K yα = K yαo ⋅ ( 1 – p Ky3 γ ) ⋅ ζ 3
(EQ 126)
K yα B y = ----------------------------( Cy Dy + εy )
(EQ 127)
S Hy = ( p Hy1 + p Hy2 d f z ) ⋅ λ Hy + p Hy3 γ y ⋅ λ Kyγ ⋅ ζ 0 + ζ 4 – 1
(EQ 128)
*
′
S Vy = F z ⋅ { ( p Vy1 + p Vy2 d f z ) ⋅ λ Vy + ( p Vy3 + p Vy4 d f z )γ ⋅ λ Kyγ } ⋅ λ µy ⋅ ζ 2
(EQ 129)
At the request of several customers, who claim conformity to ADAMS implementation of MF TIRE 5.2, the tire model includes minor differences to the formulae above: *
*
•
In (EQ 120) α instead of α used. α shall be used only in case of very large slip angles (normally never measured).
•
In (EQ 123), (EQ 124) and (EQ 129) γ y instead of γ used.
•
In (EQ 122), (EQ 126), (EQ 128) and (EQ 129) ζ 0 , ζ 2 , ζ 3 , ζ 4 and λ Kyγ are set to one.
•
The equation (EQ 126) changes to
*
Fz ′ K yα = p Ky1 F zo sin 2 atan -----------------⋅ ( 1 – p Ky3 γ y ) ⋅ λ Kyα . ′ p Ky2 F zo
(EQ 130)
with γ y = γ ⋅ λ γy *
•
In (EQ 123) λ µy instead of λ µy
•
In (EQ 129) λ µy instead of λ µx used and
CarMaker Reference Manual
(EQ 131)
used.
′
Version 2.1.6
Tire
211
Tire Model Magic Formula
•
The equation(EQ 128) changes to S Hy = ( p Hy1 + p Hy2 df ) ⋅ λ Hy + p Hy3 γ y
Lateral (pure slip)
(EQ 132)
Lat.PCY1 Shape factor for lateral forces [-].
Lat.PDY1 Lateral friction µ y [-].
Lat.PDY2 Variation of friction µ y with load [-].
Lat.PDY3 Variation of friction µ y with squared camber [-].
Lat.PEY1 Lateral curvature at Fznom F znom [-].
Lat.PEY2 Variation of curvature with load [-].
Lat.PEY3 Zero order camber dependency of curvature [-].
Lat.PEY4 Variation of curvature with camber [-].
Lat.PKY1 Maximum value of stiffness at F znom [-].
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
212
Tire Model Magic Formula
Lat.PKY2 Load at which K fy reaches maximum value [-].
Lat.PKY3 K Fz
fy - with camber [-]. Variation of ----------nom
Lat.PHY1 Horizontal shift at F znom [-].
Lat.PHY2 Variation of horizontal shift with load [-].
Lat.PHY3 Variation of horizontal shift with camber [-].
Lat.PVY1 Vertical shift at F znom .
Lat.PVY2 Variation of vertical shift with load [-].
Lat.PVY3 Variation of vertical shift with camber [-].
Lat.PVY4 Variation of vertical shift with camber and load [-].
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
213
Tire Model Magic Formula
10.4.8
Aligning Torque (pure side slip) ′
M zo = M zo + M zro
(EQ 133)
′
M zo = – t o ⋅ F yo
(EQ 134) ′
t o = t ( α t ) = D t cos ( [ C t atan { B t α t – E t ( B t α t – atan ( B t α t ) ) } ] ⋅ cos α )
(EQ 135)
*
α t = α + S Ht
(EQ 136)
S Ht = q Hz1 + q Hz2 d f z + ( q Hz3 + q Hz4 d f z )γ
*
(EQ 137)
M zro = M zr ( α r ) = D r cos [ C r atan ( B r α r ) ]
(EQ 138)
*
α r = α + S Hf ( = α f )
(EQ 139)
S Vy S Hf = S Hy + -------′ K yα
(EQ 140)
′
K yα = K yα + ε K
(EQ 141)
2 λ Kyα 2 * * B t = ( q Bz1 + q Bz2 d f z + q Bz3 d f z ) ⋅ ( 1 + q Bz5 γ + q Bz6 γ ) ⋅ ---------* λ µy
(EQ 142)
C t = q Cz1
(EQ 143)
Ro - ⋅ ( q Dz1 + q dz2 df ) ⋅ λ t ⋅ sgn V cx D to = F z ⋅ -----′ F zo
(EQ 144)
*
*
2
D t = D to ⋅ ( 1 + q Dz3 γ + q Dz4 γ ) ⋅ ζ 5
(EQ 145)
2 * 2 E t = ( q Ez1 + q Ez2 d f z + q Ez3 d f z ) 1 + ( q Ez4 + q Ez5 γ ) --- atan ( B t C t α t ) π λ Ky B r = q Bz9 ⋅ ------- + q Bz10 B y C y ⋅ ζ 6 * λ µy *
cos α ⋅
* λ µy sgn V cx
(EQ 146)
(EQ 147)
D r = F z R o { ( q BDz6 + q Dz7 d f z )λ Mr ζ 2 + ( q Dz8 + q Dz9 d f z )γ λ Kzy ζ 0 } ′
( ≤ 1)
(EQ 148)
+ ζ8 – 1
At the request of several customers, who claim conformity to ADAMS implementation of MF TIRE 5.2, the tire model includes minor differences to the formulae above: •
′
′
V VC
Cx In (EQ 135) cos α instead of cos α used. cos α = --------- shall be used
only in case of very large slip angles (normally never measured). •
*
*
In (EQ 136) and (EQ 139) α instead of α used. α shall be used only in case of very large slip angles (normally never measured)
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
214
Tire Model Magic Formula
•
The (EQ 138) changes to: M zro = M zr ( α r ) = D r cos [ atan ( B r α r ) ] cos ( α )
•
(EQ 149)
The equation (EQ 142) changes to: λ Kyα 2 B t = ( q Bz1 + q Bz2 d f z + q Bz3 d f z ) ⋅ ( 1 + q Bz4 γ z + q Bz5 γ z ) ⋅ ----------λ µy
(EQ 150)
γ z = γ ⋅ λ γz
(EQ 151)
with
•
The equation (EQ 145) changes to: 2
D t = D to ⋅ ( 1 + q Dz3 γ z + q Dz4 γ ) ⋅ ζ 5 •
(EQ 152)
The equation (EQ 148) changes to: D r = F z R o ( { ( q Dz6 + q Dz7 d f z )λ Mr ζ 2 + ( q Dz8 + q Dz9 d f z )γ z λ Kzy ζ 0 } ⋅ λ µy )
Aligning torque (pure slip)
(EQ 153)
*
•
In (EQ 137) and (EQ 142)and (EQ 145) and (EQ 146) γ z instead of γ used
•
In (EQ 144) sgn V Cx not used in the simulation.
•
In (EQ 145) γ z instead of γ
•
In (EQ 142) and (EQ 147) λ µx instead of λ µy
•
In (EQ 152), (EQ 147) and (EQ 153) ζ 5 , ζ 6 , ζ 2 , ζ 8 and λ Kzy ,are set to one.
*
used. *
used.
Align.QBZ1 Trail slope factor for trail at F znom [-].
Align.QBZ2 Variation of slope with load [-].
Align.QBZ3 Variation of slope with load squared [-].
Align.QBZ4 Variation of slope with camber [-].
Align.QBZ5 Variation of slope with absolute camber [-].
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
215
Tire Model Magic Formula
Align.QBZ9 Slope factor of residual torque [-].
Align.QBZ10 Slope factor of residual torque [-].
Align.QCZ1 Shape factor for pneumatic trail [-].
Align.QDZ1 Peak trail [-].
Align.QDZ2 Variation of peak trail with load [-].
Align.QDZ3 Variation of peak trail with camber [-].
Align.QDZ4 Variation of peak trail with camber squared [-].
Align.QDZ6 Peak residual torque [-].
Align.QDZ7 Variation of peak residual torque factor with load [-].
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
216
Tire Model Magic Formula
Align.QDZ8 Variation of peak residual torque factor with camber [-].
Align.QDZ9 Variation of peak residual torque factor with camber and load [-].
Align.QEZ1 Trail curvature at F znom [-].
Align.QEZ2 Variation of curvature with load [-].
Align.QEZ3 Variation of curvature with load squared [-].
Align.QEZ4 Variation of curvature with sgn ( α t ) [-].
Align.QEZ5 Variation of curvature with camber and sgn ( α t ) [-].
Align.QHZ1 Trail horizontal shift at F znom [-].
Align.QHZ2 Variation of shift with load [-].
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
217
Tire Model Magic Formula
Align.QHZ3 Variation of shift with camber [-]-
Align.QHZ4 Variation of shift with camber and load [-].
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
218
Tire Model Magic Formula
10.4.9
Longitudinal Force (combined slip) F x = G xα ⋅ F xo cos [ C xα atan { B xα α S – E xα ( B xα α S – atan ( B xα α S ) ) } ] G xα = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G xαo
(EQ 154)
( > 0)
G xαo = cos [ C xα atan { B xα S Hxα – E xα ( B xα S Hxα – atan ( B xα S Hxα ) ) } ] *
(EQ 155)
(EQ 156)
α S = α + S Hxα
(EQ 157)
B xα = r Bx1 cos ( [ atan ( r Bx2 κ ) ] ⋅ λ xα )
(EQ 158)
C xα = r Cx1
(EQ 159)
E xα = r Ex1 + r Ex2 d f z
(EQ 160)
S Hxα = r Hx1
(EQ 161)
At the request of several customers, who claim conformity to ADAMS implementation of MF TIRE 5.2, the tire model includes minor differences to the formulae above: •
Longitudinal (combine)
*
*
In (EQ 120) α instead of α used. α shall be used only in case of very large slip angles (normally never measured)
Long.RBX1 Slope factor for combined slip reduction [-].
Long.RBX2 Variation of slope F x reduction with κ [-].
Long.RCX1 Shape factor for combined slip F x reduction [-].
Long.REX1 Optional. Curvature factor of combined F x [-]. Default: 0.
Long.PEX2 Optional. Curvature factor of combined F x with load [-].Default: 0.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
219
Tire Model Magic Formula
Long.PHX1 Shift factor for combined slip F x reduction.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
220
Tire Model Magic Formula
10.4.10 Lateral force (combined slip) F y = G yκ ⋅ F yo + S Vyκ
(EQ 162)
cos [ C yκ atan { B yκ κ S – E yκ ( B yκ κ S – atan ( B yκ κ S ) ) } ] G xκ = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------G yκo
(EQ 163)
G yκo = cos [ C yκ atan { B yκ S Hyκ – E yκ ( B yκ S Hyκ – atan ( B yκ S Hyκ ) ) } ]
(EQ 164)
κ S = κ + S Hyκ
(EQ 165)
*
B yκ = r By1 cos [ atan { r By2 ( α – r By3 ) } ] ⋅ λ yκ
(EQ 166)
C yκ = r Cy1
(EQ 167)
( ≥ 1)
E yκ = r Ey1 + r Ey2 d f z
(EQ 168)
S Hyκ = r Hy1 + r Hy2 d f z
(EQ 169)
S Vyκ = D Vyκ sin [ r Vy5 atan ( r Vy6 κ ) ]
(EQ 170)
*
*
D Vyκ = µ y F z ⋅ ( r Vy1 + r Vy2 d f z + r Vy3 γ ) ⋅ cos ( [ atan ( r Vy4 α ) ] ⋅ ζ 2 )
(EQ 171)
At the request of several customers, who claim conformity to ADAMS implementation of MF TIRE 5.2, the tire model includes minor differences to the formulae above: *
*
•
In (EQ 166) and (EQ 171) α instead of α used i. α shall be used only in case of very large slip angles (normally never measured)
•
In (EQ 171) γ z instead of γ used.
•
(EQ 170) changes to
*
S Vyκ = D Vyκ sin [ r Vy5 atan ( r Vy6 κ ) ]λ Vyκ •
Lateral (combined slip)
(EQ 172)
In (EQ 171) ζ 2 and is set to one.
Lat.RBY1 Slope factor for combined F y reduction [-].
Lat.RBY2 Variation of slope F y reduction with alpha [-].
Lat.RBY3 Shift term for alpha in slope F y reduction [-].
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
221
Tire Model Magic Formula
Lat.RCY1 Shape factor for combined F y reduction [-].
Lat.REY1 Optional. Curvature factor of combined F y [-]. Default: 0.
Lat.REY2 Optional. Curvature factor of combined F y with load [-].Default: 0.
Lat.RHY1 Shift factor for combined F y reduction [-].
Lat.RHY2 Optional. Shift factor for combined F y reduction with load [-]. Default: 0.
Lat.RVY1 κ induced side force at F z
nom
[-].
Lat.RVY2 Variation of κ induced side force with load [-].
Lat.RVY3 Variation of κ induced side force with camber [-].
Lat.RVY4 Variation of κ induced side force with α [-].
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
222
Tire Model Magic Formula
Lat.RVY5 Variation of κ induced side force with κ [-].
Lat.RVY6 Variation of κ induced side force with atan ( κ ) [-].
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
223
Tire Model Magic Formula
10.4.11 Aligning Torque (combined slip) ′
M z = M z + M zr + s ⋅ F x ′
(EQ 173)
′
Mz = –( t ⋅ Fy )
(EQ 174) ′
t = t ( α t, eq ) = D t cos ( [ C t atan { B t α t, eq – E t ( B t α t, eq – atan ( B t α t, eq ) ) } ] ⋅ cos α ) ′
(EQ 175)
F y = F y – S Vyκ
(EQ 176)
M zr = M zr ( α r, eq ) = D r cos [ C r atan ( B r α r, eq ) ]
(EQ 177)
Fy * - + ( s sz3 + s sz4 d f z )γ ⋅ λ s s = R o ⋅ s sz1 + s sz2 -----′ F zo
(EQ 178)
α t, eg =
K xκ 2 2 2 - κ ⋅ sgn ( α t ) α t + -------′ K yα
(EQ 179)
α r, eg =
K xκ 2 2 2 - κ ⋅ sgn ( α r ) α r + -------′ K yα
(EQ 180)
At the request of several customers, who claim conformity to ADAMS implementation of MF TIRE 5.2, the tire model includes minor differences to the formulae above: •
The (EQ 177) changes to M zr = M zr ( α r, eq ) = D r cos [ atan ( B r α r, eq ) ] ⋅ cos α
•
′
′
V VC
Cx In (EQ 175) cos ( α ) instead of cos α used. cos α = --------- shall be used only in case of
very large slip angles (normally never measured)
Aligning Torque (combined slip)
(EQ 181)
*
•
In (EQ 178) γ z instead of γ used.
•
The (EQ 179) and (EQ 180) change to K xκ 2 2 2 - + κ ⋅ sgn ( α t ) α t, eg = atan tan α t + -------′ K yα
(EQ 182)
K xκ 2 2 2 - + κ ⋅ sgn ( α r ) α r, eg = atan tan α r + -------′ K yα
(EQ 183)
Align.SSZ1 s Ro
Nominal value of ------ effect of F x on M z [-].
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
224
Tire Model Magic Formula
Align.SSZ2 s Ro
F Fz
y Variation of distance ------ with ----------- [-]. nom
Align.SSZ3 s Ro
Variation of distance ------ with camber [-].
Align.SSZ4 s Ro
Variation of distance ------ with load and camber [-].
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
225
Tire Model Magic Formula
10.4.12 Overturning Couple Fy * - ⋅ λ Mx M x = F z R o ⋅ q sx1 – q Sx2 γ + q sx3 -----′ F zo
(EQ 184)
At the request of several customers, who claim conformity to ADAMS implementation of MF TIRE 5.2, the tire model includes minor differences to the formulae above: •
The (EQ 184) changes to Fy - λ M x = F z R o q sx1 λ VMx + – q Sx2 γ + q sx3 -----′ Mx F zo
Overturning Couple
(EQ 185)
OverTurn.QSX1 Lateral force induced overturning couple [-].
OverTurn.QSX2 Camber induced overturning couple [-].
OverTurn.QSX3 F y induced overturning couple [-]. (EQ 186)
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
226
Tire Model Magic Formula
10.4.13 Rolling Resistance Moment Fx Vr - ⋅ λ My M y = – F z R o ⋅ q sy1 atan ------ + q sy2 -----′ V o F zo
(EQ 187)
At the request of several customers to claim conformity to ADAMS implementation of MF TIRE 5.2, the tire model includes minor differences to the formula above: •
The (EQ 187) changes to Fx Vx 4 Vx M y = – F z R o ⋅ q sy1 + q 2sy ------- + q Sy3 --------+ q Sy4 ---------- ⋅ λ My V ref F zo V ref
(EQ 188)
where V ref means measurement speed. If q sy1 and q sy2 are both zero, then the following formula is used: M y = R o ( S Vx + K x ⋅ S Hx ) Roll Resistance Moment
(EQ 189)
Roll.QSY1 Rolling resistance torque coefficient [-].
Roll.QSY2 Rolling resistance torque depending on F x [-].
Roll.QSY3 Optional. Rolling resistance torque depending on speed [-].Default: 0.
Roll.QSY4 4
Optional. Rolling resistance torque depending on speed [-]. Default: 0.
Roll.LONGVL Optional. Measurement speed. Default:10 [m/s].
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
227
Tire Model Magic Formula
10.4.14 Transient Behavior For transient effects slip speeds instead of α and κ are used. First-order lags for tire longitudinal and lateral deformations u and v are introduced through relaxation length σ k and κa : du σ κ ------ + V Cx u = – σ κ V Sx dt
(EQ 190)
dv σ α ------ + V Cx v = σ α V Sy dt
(EQ 191)
These differential equations are based on the assumption that the contact point is not slidding.The relaxation lengths are only functions of vertical load and camber angle: Ro - ⋅ λ σκ σ κ = F z ⋅ ( p Tx1 + p Tx2 d f z ) ⋅ exp ( – p Tx3 d f z ) ⋅ -----′ F zo
(EQ 192)
Fz - ⋅ ( 1 – p Ky3 γ ) ⋅ R o λ Fzo λ σα σ α = p Ty1 sin 2 atan ----------------′ p Ty2 F zo
(EQ 193)
′
′
The practical tire deformation quantities κ and α are subsequently used instead of arguments κ and α in the equations (EQ 154), (EQ 162), (EQ 173), (EQ 185) and (EQ 188).They are defined as follows: u ′ κ = ------ sgn ( V Cx ) σκ
(EQ 194)
v ′ tan α = -----σα
(EQ 195)
Starting from (EQ 190) and (EQ 191) the transient behavior could be described with a low pass filter. The time constant reads: σκ T = --------Vx
(EQ 196)
σα T = --------Vx
(EQ 197)
for the longitudinal action and
for lateral action.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
228
Tire Model Magic Formula
10.4.15 Gyroscopic couple Due to the tire inertia acting about the vertical axis an offset is added to the aligning torque computed with equation (EQ 173): dv M z, gyr = c gyr m Belt V rl ------ cos [ atan ( B r α r, eq ) ] dt
(EQ 198)
c gyr = q Tz1 ⋅ λ gyr
(EQ 199)
cos [ atan ( B r α r, eq ) ] = 1
(EQ 200)
with parameter
and
for pure cornering condition. The total aligning torque becomes now: ′
M z = M z + M z, gyr Gyroscopic couple
(EQ 201)
Align.PTX1 Relaxation length at F znom [-].
Align.PTX2 Variation of relaxation length with load [-].
Align.PTX3 Variation of relaxation length with exponent of load [-].
Align.TY1 Peak value of relaxation length [-].
Align.TY2 Shape factor for relaxation length [-].
Align.QTZ1 Gyroscopic torque constant [-].
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
229
Tire Model Magic Formula
Align.MBELT Belt mass of the wheel [Kg].
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Tire
230
Tire Model Magic Formula
10.4.16 Friction coefficient If the tire parameters have been detemined at friction conditions which differ from the actual friction condition at road, an effective friction coefficient will be used for the tire computation. For normal conditions the friction coefficient is assumed to be one at measurement conditions. If not, the exact conditions could be specified with the scale factors λ µx and λ µy .With the actual friction condition for the road patch the effective friction value used for the computation reads: µ Road µ eff x, y = -----------λ µx, y
(EQ 202)
This value is used instead of λ µx respectivelly λ µy in (EQ 116), (EQ 117), (EQ 123), (EQ 129), (EQ 148), (EQ 150) and (EQ 153).
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Trailer Model
232
Overview
Chapter 11
Trailer Model
11.1
Overview Like the vehicle model the trailer model is a MESA VERDE multi body model consisting of the vehicle body, 2 or 4 wheel carriers, 2 or 4 wheels and a additional load mass. This trailer model suits passenger towing vehicles and therefore only supports trailers with single or twin axle.
h COM, v lf
hh
h COM, t
lr l
x COM, t lo
l db
Figure 11.1: Common measures for a vehicle with trailer
Relevant quantities are: h COM, v h COM, t hh l lf lr lo l db x COM, t
CarMaker Reference Manual
height of towing vehicles COM height of trailers COM height of hitch wheel base of towing vehicle distance between COM and front axle distance between COM and rear axle hitch overhang drawbar length distance between COM and axle
Version 2.1.6
Trailer Model
233
General Trailer Parameters
11.2
General Trailer Parameters RefPointInputSystem =
x
y
z
This parameter specifies the origin of the Fr1 (in FrD coordinates). The coordinates XYZ point from the origin of FrD to the origin of Fr1. (see section 1.2 ’CarMaker Axis Systems’).
BucklingAngle_max =
Angle
Optional. This parameter specifies the maximum buckling angle Angle [deg] which is tolerated without issuing an error message. Higher angles lead to an abortion of the current testrun.
nAxle =
NumberOfAxles
Number of trailer axles. Possible values: 1, 2
Tire. =
TireParameterSet
Specifies the parameters of tire to use for wheel front left (i=0), front right (i=1), rear left (i=2) and rear right (i=3). TireParameterSet is the name of a tire parameter set out of directory Data/Tire.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Trailer Model
234
Mass Geometry
11.3
Mass Geometry
11.3.1
Overview The representation of the distribution of mass in a material system is called mass geometry. Inertia properties are associated with the trailer-body, each of the two/four wheel carriers and each wheel. Additional body loads are modeled via additional masses and inertias as well. Three parameters have to be specified to define a mass element: •
The mass value of the body to define.
•
The center of mass (CoM) of each body is defined. The center of mass is a geometrical point. The three scalar quantities are the position vector of CoM decomposed relative to the origin of the definition frame.
•
The inertia tensor (= second moments of mass = moments of inertia) is a symmetric second-order tensor, which is specified by six scalar quantities I = A B C D E F (Frequently the off-diagonal elements (D, E, F) of the inertia tensor are neglected):
∫
A F E F B D = E D C
2
( y + z 2 ) dm
–
symmetry
∫
xy dm
–
∫
2
( z + x 2 ) dm
–
symmetry
xz dm
∫
yz dm
(EQ 203)
Body
Body
symmetry
∫
Body
Body
Body
∫
2
( x + y 2 ) dm
Body
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Trailer Model
235
Mass Geometry
11.3.2
Parameters
Body.pos = Body.mass = Body.I =
x y Mass ...
z
Trailer body with total mass Body.mass [kg]. Position of the center of mass (CoM) Body.pos is given in FrD (design configuration axis system). Inertia tensor Body.I at the CoM decomposed in the basis of the FrD. The elements of the inertia tensor (section 3.1 ’Overview’)
TrimLoad..pos = TrimLoad..mass = TrimLoad..I =
x y Mass ...
z
Bodies to trim mass contribution to that of a reference vehicle. Trim loads are fixed to vehicle body. := 0, 1, 2, ... Do not confuse TrimLoads with test run specific additional charges you may want to put on your vehicle.
WheelCarrier.fl.pos WheelCarrier.fl.mass WheelCarrier.fl.I Wheel carrier front left. Represents all unsprung mass in the suspension (except the wheel).
WheelCarrier.fr.pos WheelCarrier.fr.mass WheelCarrier.fl.r Wheel carrier front right. For details, see wheel carrier front left.
WheelCarrier.rl.pos WheelCarrier.rl.mass WheelCarrier.rl.I Wheel carrier rear left. For details, see wheel carrier front left.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Trailer Model
236
Mass Geometry
WheelCarrier.rr.pos WheelCarrier.rr.mass WheelCarrier.rr.I Wheel carrier rear right. For details, see wheel carrier front left.
Wheel.fl.pos Wheel.fl.mass Wheel.fl.I Wheel front left. The wheel and all other rotating components (parts of the brake, ...) .
Wheel.fr.pos Wheel.fr.mass Wheel.fl.r Wheel front right. For details, see wheel front left.
Wheel.rl.pos Wheel.rl.mass Wheel.rl.I Wheel rear left. For details, see wheel front left.
Wheel.rr.pos Wheel.rr.mass Wheel.rr.I Wheel rear right. For details, see wheel front left.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Trailer Model
237
Suspension Force Elements
11.4
Suspension Force Elements SuspF means front axle, SuspR means rear axle. With a single axle the parameters for SuspR can be omitted.
11.4.1
Spring
SuspF.cAmplify = SuspR.cAmplify =
factor factor
Spring amplification factor. Values given by the spring force model is multiplied with this factor (output value).
SuspPos.c =
dFrc/dq
Spring constant [N/m] of specified wheel.
11.4.2
Damper
SuspF.kAmplify = factor SuspR.kAmplify = factor Damper amplification factor factor. Values given by the damper force model (compression and rebound) is multiplied with this factor (output value).
SuspF.kPush = SuspR.kPush =
dFrc/dqp dFrc/dqp
Damper constant for compression damping. Dimension: Ns/m.
SuspF.kPull = SuspR.kPull =
dFrc/dqp dFrc/dqp
Damper constant dFrc/dqp [Ns/m]for rebound damping.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Trailer Model
238
Suspension Force Elements
11.4.3
Stabilizer
SuspF.cStAmplify = SuspR.cStAmplify =
factor factor
Stabilizer amplification factor factor. Values given by the stabilizer force model is multiplied with this factor (output value).
SuspF.cSt = SuspR.cSt =
dFrc/dq dFrc/dq
Stabilizer constant dFrc/dq for specified axle.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Trailer Model
239
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
11.5
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
11.5.1
Overview Three types of common trailer suspensions can be selected: •
Sleeve axle
•
Crank axle
•
Semi-Trailing Arm axle
Additional to the suspension kinematics, suspension force elements (spring, damper and stabilizer) and a simple nonlinear compliance is supported.
11.5.2
Sleeve Axle The simplest model of a suspension is the sleeve axle.
z
x
y
Figure 11.4: Model of a sleeve axle
It is characterized through a straight translation of the wheel carrier. In Figure 11.4 the translation in z coordinate direction is shown. There is no modification of toe or camber whilst compression.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Trailer Model
240
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
11.5.3
Crank Axle The most commonly used suspension for passenger cars trailers is the crank axle. The crank axle has a rotating axis of the crank arms perpendicular to the trailers roll axis. The wheel carriers are connected at the end of the crank arms. The COM of the wheel carriers moves on a orbit around the y axis of Figure 11.6.
z
x
y ry
l Figure 11.6: Principal of a crank axle
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Trailer Model
241
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
11.5.4
Semi Trailing Arm Axle The semi trailing arm axle uses the same principal as the crank axle. The difference is that the rotating axis is not along the y-axis like depicted in Figure 11.8. Through this different orientation the wheel practises a camber change.
z
y x ry
l Figure 11.8: Principal of a semi trailing axle
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Trailer Model
242
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
11.5.5
General Suspension Model Parameters SuspF means front axle, SuspR means rear axle.
Susp.Kind =
SuspensionKind
Type SuspensionKind of suspension (for both axles). Possible options are: Susp.Kind
Description
Sleeve
Kinematics of a sleeve axle is used
Crank
Kinematics of a crank axle is used
SemiTrailingArm
Kinematics of a semi trailing arm axle is used
z
z x
definition of positive camber angle
x definition of positive toe angle
y
y
y
y
Figure 11.10: Sign conventions for camber- and toe-angle
SuspF.InclinationL = SuspR.InclinationL =
InclinAngle InclinAngle
Camber angle InclinAngle [rad] of left wheel in design configuration FrD. Positive sign means the distance on the upper side of the wheel is longer then on the bottom side.
SuspF.InclinationR = SuspR.InclinationR =
InclinAngle InclinAngle
Camber angle InclinAngle [rad] of left wheel in design configuration FrD.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Trailer Model
243
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
SuspF.ToeL = SuspR.ToeL =
ToeAngle ToeAngle
Toe angle ToeAngle [rad] of left wheel carrier in design configuration FrD. Positive sign means toe-in, negative sign means toe-out.
SuspF.ToeR = SuspR.ToeR =
ToeAngle ToeAngle
Toe angle ToeAngle [rad] of right wheel carrier in design configuration FrD. Positive sign means toe-in, negative sign means toe-out.
11.5.6
Additional Parameters for Suspension Model “Sleeve” No additional parameters are needed.
11.5.7
Additional Parameters for Suspension Model “Crank” SuspF means front axle, SuspR means rear axle.
SuspF.lCrank = SuspR.lCrank =
length length
Crank length [m].
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Trailer Model
244
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
11.5.8
Additional Parameters for Suspension Model “SemiTrailingArm” Two points specify the rotation axle of each wheel carrier. The points must not be identical. The FrD axis system is used (see section 1.2 ’CarMaker Axis Systems’). SuspF means front axle, SuspR means rear axle, L means left, R means right.
SuspF.AxlePosL.1 = SuspF.AxlePosR.1 = SuspR.AxlePosL.1 = SuspR.AxlePosR.1 =
x x x x
y y y y
z z z z
First point for wheel carrier rotation axle.
SuspF.AxlePosL.2 = SuspF.AxlePosR.2 = SuspR.AxlePosL.2 = SuspR.AxlePosR.2 =
x x x x
y y y y
z z z z
Second point for wheel carrier rotation axle.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Trailer Model
245
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
11.5.9
Compliance ty x
Tz y
rx
rz
Tx F T y y
Fy T y y
Fx
z
Tx
Tz F T y y y
Fz
x
Tz
Fx Tx
Figure 11.12: Trailer compliance
Susp.ElastoActive =
active
Use compliance (elasto kinematics) for trailer. To activate compliance kinematics use active=1, to deactivate use active=0.
Elasto.FrontLeft.ty = Elasto.FrontRight.ty = Elasto.RearLeft.ty = Elasto.RearRight.ty =
dty/dFx dty/dFy dty/dFz dty/dTx dty/dTy dty/dTz ... ... ...
This parameter specifies the compliance vector for the wheel travel direction t y . The six coefficients of this vector form elasticities of six forces and torques acting on the wheel carrier. Usually there is no compliance beside the wheel compression for a force F z . Therefore m m this parameter usually is set to zero. Dimensions: ---- for forces, --------- for torques. N
Nm
Remark: The acting forces are decomposed in carrier frame Fr2.
Elasto.FrontLeft.rx = Elasto.FrontRight.rx = Elasto.RearLeft.rx = Elasto.RearRight.rx =
drx/dFx drx/dFy drx/dFz drx/dTx drx/drx drx/dTz ... ... ...
This parameter specifies the compliance vector for the wheel rotation r x . The six coefficients of this vector form elasticities of six forces and torques acting on the wheel carrier. Usually there is no compliance beside the wheel compression for a force F z . Therefore this rad rad parameter usually is set to zero. Dimensions: -------- for forces, --------- for torques. N
CarMaker Reference Manual
Nm
Version 2.1.6
Trailer Model
246
Suspension Kinematics and Compliance
Remark: The acting forces are decomposed in carrier frame Fr2.
Elasto.FrontLeft.rz = Elasto.FrontRight.rz = Elasto.RearLeft.rz = Elasto.RearRight.rz =
drz/dFx drz/dFy drz/dFz drz/dTx drz/drz drz/dTz ... ... ...
This parameter specifies the compliance vector for the wheel rotation r z . The six coefficients of this vector form elasticities of six forces and torques acting on the wheel carrier. Usually there is no compliance beside the wheel compression for a force F z . Therefore this rad rad parameter usually is set to zero. Dimensions: -------- for forces, --------- for torques. N
Nm
Remark: The acting forces are decomposed in carrier frame Fr2.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Trailer Model
247
Hitch
11.6
Hitch
11.6.1
Overview The trailer model is connected to the towing vehicle by a virtual spring-damper-system. The point of contact is in the middle of the coupling device. The parameters are determined automatically depending on the masses of the vehicles. The parameters are chosen in a way that even with huge coupling forces the relative travel of the coupling contact points is about a few millimeters and numerical stability is ensured. To ensure stabilization of the trailer different hitch improvements have been developed. The CarMaker trailer model supports the following hitch types: •
No stabilization, normal ball joint
•
Four joint hitch
•
Ball joint hitch with friction damper
•
Ball joint with buckling angle dependent hydraulic damping
Parameters
Hitch.Kind =
KindStr
Specifies the type of hitch stabilization model to use. Possible values are: Hitch.Kind
Description
Ball
no stabilization, normal ball joint
Trapez
four joint hitch
BallFric
ball joint hitch with friction damper
BallDamp
ball joint with buckling angle dependent hydraulic damping
Example
Hitch.pos =
Hitch.Kind = BallFric
x
y
z
Center position of the trailers hitch. Coordinates are specified in trailers FrD axis system.
Hitch.c =
dFrc/dq
Optional. Overwrite the internally computed spring constant for trailer hitch. With this parameter not real values for the trailers hitch spring constant should be used rather then values that ensure numerical stability. Default: a default is computed internally by the masses of towing vehicle and trailer.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Trailer Model
248
Hitch
Hitch.k =
dFrc/dqp
Optional. Overwrite the internally computed damper constant for trailer hitch. With this parameter not real values for the trailers hitch damper constant should be used rather then values that ensure numerical stability. Default: a default is computed internally by a ratio of spring constant to damper constant.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Trailer Model
249
Hitch
11.6.2
Additional Parameters for Hitch “Ball” No additional parameters needed.
11.6.3
Additional Parameters for Hitch “Trapez” δ A
ab a a0 d
x b1
b2
y B
b b0 r
Figure 11.14: Trapetz hitch
Hitch.Trapez.ab =
length
Length of the trapezoid in direction of vehicles roll axle. See Figure 11.14.
Hitch.Trapez.b1 =
length
Short width of trapez. See Figure 11.14.
Hitch.Trapez.b2 =
length
Long width of trapez. See Figure 11.14.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Trailer Model
250
Hitch
11.6.4
Additional Parameters for Hitch “BallFric”
Hitch.Fric.Adjust =
factor
Adaption parameter for calculation of stick-slip behavior. For this calculation trailer mass is altered by this factor. Use 1.0 as standard parameter. Example
Hitch.Fric.Adjust = 1.0
Hitch.Fric.myH =
mu
Static friction coefficient between ball-shaped hitch head and frictions elements.
Hitch.Fric.myG =
mu
Sliding friction coefficient between ball-shaped hitch head and frictions elements.
Hitch.Fric.FNorm =
FrcNorm
Normal force preloading the frictions elements against ball-shaped head. Example
11.6.5
Hitch.Fric.FNorm = 2000
Additional Parameters for Hitch “BallDamp”
Hitch.DampKonst =
dFrc/dqp
Damper constant dFrc/dqp [Ns/rad] (equal in all directions of space). Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
Hitch.DampKonst = 50
Version 2.1.6
Trailer Model
251
Brake System
11.7
Brake System
11.7.1
Overview The brake system of a passenger cars trailer consists of a overrun device, a transmission device and the wheel brakes.
11.7.2
Parameters
Brake.Kind =
KindStr
Type of brake system used. Possible options: Brake.Kind
Description
““
Trailer without brake system
Overrun
Overrun brake, brake torque proportional to drawbar force
Overrun1
Overrun brake, brake torque based on friction
Brake.Ratio Ratio of the sum of all brake forces on all wheels to the force of the trailer hitch. In EWG directive 71/320 “brake systems” a ratio of 5 is compulsory. Example
Brake.Ratio = 5
Brake.Fmin =
value
Operating threshold of the overrun brake. Dimension: N Example
11.7.3
Brake.Fmin = 200
Additional Parameters for Brake Model “Overrun”
Brake.Delay =
value
Time delay for brake force rise. A first order delay element is used. Too small values may lead to instabilities, too high values are not realistic. Dimension: s. Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
Brake.Delay = 0.4
Version 2.1.6
Trailer Model
252
Brake System
11.7.4
Additional Parameters for Brake Model “Overrun1”
Brake.Fric.Adjust =
value
Adaption parameter for calculation of stick-slip behavior. For this calculation trailer mass is altered by this factor. Use 1.0 as standard parameter.
Brake.Fric.myH =
value
Static friction coefficient between brake pads and brake drum (brake disk). Example
Brake.Fric.myH = 0.55
Brake.Fric.myG =
value
Sliding friction coefficient between brake pads and brake drum (brake disk). Example
CarMaker Reference Manual
Brake.Fric.myG = 0.45
Version 2.1.6
Trailer Model
253
Aerodynamics
11.8
Aerodynamics The trailer uses the same aerodynamic model as the towing vehicle. For general description see section 6.3.1 ’‘Coeff6x1’’.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Trailer Model
254
User Accessible Quantities for Trailer
11.9
User Accessible Quantities for Trailer
11.9.1
General User Accessible Quantities: Trailer Name
Frame
Unit
Info True (1) if trailermodel is active (driving with trailer)
Tr.Active Tr.Aero.Frc_1.x Tr.Aero.Frc_1.y Tr.Aero.Frc_1.z
Fr1
Tr.Aero.Trq_1.x Tr.Aero.Trq_1.y Tr.Aero.Trq_1.z
Fr1
Tr.Aero.tau_1
Fr1
rad
Angle of incidence
Tr.Aero.tau2_1
Fr1
rad
Angle of incidence (shifted by 2π)
Tr.Aero.vres_1.x Tr.Aero.vres_1.y Tr.Aero.vres_1.z
Fr1
m/s
Wind velocity
Tr.C<pos>.tx Tr.C<pos>.ty Tr.C<pos>.tz
Fr1
m
Translation carrier reference point front left (used for animation) <pos> = FL, FR, RL, RR
rad
Rotation carrier front left (used for animation) <pos> = FL, FR, RL, RR
Tr.C<pos>.rx Tr.C<pos>.ry Tr.C<pos>.rz
m
Aerodynamic force acting on trailer
Aerodynamic torque
Tr.C<pos>.C.t_0.x Tr.C<pos>.C.t_0.y Tr.C<pos>.C.t_0.z
Fr0
m
wheel center C
Tr.C<pos>.P.t_0.x Tr.C<pos>.P.t_0.y Tr.C<pos>.P.t_0.z
Fr0
m
wheel road contact point P
Tr.Con.ax Tr.Con.ay Tr.Con.az
Fr0
m/s^2
Center of mass, translational acceleration
Tr.Con.ax_1 Tr.Con.ay_1 Tr.Con.az_1
Fr1
m/s^2
Center of mass, translational acceleration
Tr.Con.tx Tr.Con.ty Tr.Con.tz
Fr0
m
Center of mass, translational position
Tr.Con.vx Tr.Con.vy Tr.Con.vz
Fr0
m/s
Center of mass, translational velocity
Tr.CoM.vx_1 Tr.CoM.vy_1 Tr.CoM.vz_1
Fr1
m/s
Center of mass, translational velocity
Tr.Fr1.ax Tr.Fr1.ay Tr.Fr1.az
Fr0
m/s^2
Translational acceleration
Tr.Fr1.rx Tr.Fr1.ry Tr.Fr1.rz
CarMaker Reference Manual
Trailer rotation angles, Cardan angles, whereby Tr.rz = Tr.Yaw.ry = Car.Pitch and Car.rz = Car.Roll (DIN 70000, 2.2.1.1 - 3)
Version 2.1.6
Trailer Model
255
User Accessible Quantities for Trailer
Name
Frame
Unit
Info
Tr.Fr1.tx Tr.Fr1.ty Tr.Fr1.tz
Fr0
m
Translational position
Tr.Fr1.vx Tr.Fr1.vy Tr.Fr1.vz
Fr0
m/s
Translational velocity
Tr.Fx<pos> Tr.Fy<pos> Tr.Fz<pos>
FrH
N
longitudinal, lateral and vertical ground reaction force at wheel/road contact point
Tr.Hitch.Frc2Tr.x Tr.Hitch.Frc2Tr.y Tr.Hitch.Frc2Tr.z
Fr0
Hitch force from external (car) to trailer
Tr.Hitch.Frc2Tr.x_1 Tr.Hitch.Frc2Tr.y_1 Tr.Hitch.Frc2Tr.z_1
Fr1
Hitch force from external (car) to trailer
Tr.Hitch.Trq2Tr.x Tr.Hitch.Trq2Tr.y Tr.Hitch.Trq2Tr.z
Fr0
Hitch torque from external (car) to trailer
Tr.Hitch.Trq2Tr.x_1 Tr.Hitch.Trq2Tr.y_1 Tr.Hitch.Trq2Tr.z_1
Fr1
Hitch torque from external (car) to trailer
Tr.Hitch.tx Tr.Hitch.ty Tr.Hitch.tz
Fr0
Hitch translational position
Tr.Hitch.vx Tr.Hitch.vy Tr.Hitch.vz
Fr0
Hitch translational velocity
kg
Mass of load, := 0, 1, 2
m
Position of i-th load, i= 0..2
Tr.LongSlip<pos>
–
Longitudinal slip
Tr.Pitch
rad
Trailer pitch angle (DIN 70000, 2.2.1.1) Positive, if front goes down and rear of trailer comes up.
Tr.Roll
rad
Trailer roll angle (DIN 70000, 2.2.1.3) Positive, if right side goes down and left side comes up.
Tr.SideSlipAngle
rad
Sideslip angle (DIN 70000, 2.2.1.4)
Tr.SideSlipAngle2
rad
Sideslip angle with an offset of 2*PI
Tr.SideSlipAngleVel
rad/s
Sideslip angle velocity (DIN 70000, 2.2.1.4)
Tr.Load..mass Tr.Load..tx Tr.Load..ty Tr.Load..tz
Fr1
simulation phase
Tr.SimPhase Tr.TrqBrake<pos>
Nm
Brake torque o
Tr.Virtual.Frc_0.x Tr.Virtual.Frc_0.y Tr.Virtual.Frc_0.z
Fr0
N
Virtual force acting to trailer body from external
Tr.Virtual.Frc_1.x Tr.Virtual.Frc_1.y Tr.Virtual.Frc_1.z
Fr1
N
Virtual force acting to trailer body from external
Tr.Virtual.Trq_0.x Tr.Virtual.Trq_0.y Tr.Virtual.Trq_0.z
Fr0
Nm
Virtual torque acting to trailer body from external
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
Trailer Model
256
User Accessible Quantities for Trailer
Name
Frame
Info
Nm
Virtual torque acting to trailer body from external
Tr.W<pos>.rot
rad
Wheel rotation angle around wheel spin axis
Tr.WheelSpd_<pos>
rad/s
Rotational wheel velocity
Tr.Yaw
rad
yaw angle (DIN 70000, 2.2.1.1) Angle between Xaxis of trailer and X-axis of earth fixed system. Positive for positive rotation around Z-axis.
Tr.YawVel
rad/s
yaw angle velocity (DIN 70000, 2.2.2.1)
Tr.alHori
m/s^2
horizontal lateral acceleration
Tr.atHori
m/s^2
horizontal tangential acceleration
m/s^2
acceleration
Tr.dr_z_0
rad
Yaw angle difference between trailer and tractor
Tr.drv_z_0
rad/s
Yaw angle velocity difference between trailer and tractor
Tr.sRoad
m
Trailer road coordinate
Tr.Virtual.Trq_1.x Tr.Virtual.Trq_1.y Tr.Virtual.Trq_1.z
Tr.ax Tr.ay Tr.az
Tr.tx Tr.ty Tr.tz
Fr1
Unit
Fr1
Fr0
m/s
Tr.v<pos> Tr.vx Tr.vy Tr.vz
CarMaker Reference Manual
m
Fr1
Wheel velocity (based on wheel rotation and wheel radius)
m/s
Version 2.1.6
User Accessible Quantities
257
Chapter 12V
User Accessible Quantities
For a better understanding of the naming conventions of UAQ´s please refer to section 1.4 ’CarMaker Naming Conventions’.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
User Accessible Quantities
258
General User Accessible Quantities
12.1
General User Accessible Quantities Name
Unit
Info
Ambient.AirDensity
kg/m3
Air density of the environment.
Ambient.AirHumidity
-
Air humidity of the environment.
Ambient.AirPressure
bar
Air pressure of the environment.
Ambient.Temperature
K
Temperature of the environment.
Ambient.WindVel_ext.x Ambient.WindVel_ext.y Ambient.WindVel_ext.z
m/s
Global wind direction vector of the environment.
CycleNo
-
Number of calculation cycle from the start of the application.
DeltaT
s
Complete duration of calculation cycle
Time
s
Simulation-time of the current testrun. Time starts after initialization process is finished. This time may be accelerated or delayed during non-realtime simulations.
Time.Global
s
Simulation-time since start of the application. This time may be accelerated or delayed during non-realtime simulations.
Time.WC
s
“Wall-clock-time”. This is the real elapsed time during the start of the application. In non-realtime simulations this time may differ from Time.Global
TCPU.AposEvalSend
s
Time-consumption for function AposEvalSend of the current calculation cycle.
TCPU.AposPoll
s
Time-consumption for function AposPoll of the current calculation cycle.
TCPU.Brake
s
Time-consumption for calculation of the Brake module during the current calculation cycle.
TCPU.DrivMan
s
Time-consumption for calculation of the DrivMan module during the current calculation cycle.
TCPU.In
s
Time-consumption for calculation of the IO_In module during the current calculation cycle.
TCPU.Out
s
Time-consumption for calculation of the IO_Out module during the current calculation cycle.
TCPU.PowerTrain
s
Time-consumption for calculation of the PowerTrain module during the current calculation cycle.
TCPU.Total
s
Total time-consumption for calculation of the current cycle. This should not be confused with DeltaT
TCPU.Trailer
s
Time-consumption for calculation of the Trailer module during the current calculation cycle.
TCPU.User
s
Time-consumption for calculation of the User module during the current calculation cycle.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
User Accessible Quantities
259
General User Accessible Quantities
Name
12.1.1
Unit
TCPU.Vehicle
s
TC.Clock
s
TC.Count
s
Info Time-consumption for calculation of the Vehicle module during the current calculation cycle.
User Accessible Quantities: Driving Maneuvers Name
Unit
Info
DM.Brake
brake/decelerator activity (0..1)
DM.BrakePark
park brake activity (0..1)
DM.BrakeLever
brake lever activity (0..1), (only for motorcycles)
DM.Clutch
clutch activity (0..1)
DM.Gas
gas/throttle/accelrator activity (0..1)
DM.GearNo
gear number
DM.GearNo.Trgt DM.Handbrake DM.LaneOffset
outdated name for DM.BrakePark m
DM.Lap.No
lateral lane offset for IPG-DRIVER lap number (racing mode)
DM.Lap.Time
s
lap time (racing mode)
DM.ManDist
m
mini maneuver distance
DM.ManNo DM.ManTime
mini maneuver number s
mini maneuver time
DM.SelectorCtrl DM.Shifting DM.SpeedTrap.Dist
active gear shift m
DM.SpeedTrap.Id DM.SpeedTrap.Time
s
DM.StarterCtrl DM.Steer.Ang
rad
steering angle
DM.Steer.AngAcc
rad/s^2
steering angle acceleration
DM.Steer.AngVel
rad/s
steering angle velocity
DM.Steer.Trq
Nm
steering torque
DM.ax.Trgt
m/s^2
target acceleration
DM.v.Trgt
m/s
target velocity
DM.vdelta.Trgt
m/s
target velocity deviation
DM.SteerBy
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
User Accessible Quantities
260
User Accessible Quantities for Vehicle Body
12.2
User Accessible Quantities for Vehicle Body
12.2.1
User Accessible Quantities: Vehicle Name
Frame
Unit
Info
Vhcl.Distance
m
Distance the vehicle (center of mass) traveled since start of simulation50
Vhcl.Engine.on
-
Flag gets true (1) when engine is running.
Vhcl.Engine.rotv
rad/s
Engine speed.
Vhcl.GearBox.rotv_in
rad/s
Input speed of gearbox.
Vhcl.Hitch.x Vhcl.Hitch.y Vhcl.Hitch.z
m
Hitch position.
Vhcl.LongSlip<pos>
-
Vhcl.PoI.ax_1 Vhcl.PoI.ay_1 Vhcl.PoI.az_1
Fr1
m/s^2
Point of Interest??
Vhcl.PoI.vx Vhcl.PoI.vy Vhcl.PoI.vz
Fr0
m/s
Velocity vector for PoI
Vhcl.PoI.vx_1 Vhcl.PoI.vy_1 Vhcl.PoI.vz_1
Fr1
m/s
Velocity vector for PoI
Vhcl.PoI.x Vhcl.PoI.y Vhcl.PoI.z
m
Vhcl.Roll
rad
Vhcl.RollAcc
rad/s^2
Vhcl.RollVel
rad/s
Vhcl.SideSlip<pos>
rad
Vhcl.Steer.Acc
rad/s^2
Vhcl.Steer.Ang
rad
Vhcl.Steer.Vel
rad/s
Vhcl.Wind.vx Vhcl.Wind.vy Vhcl.Wind.vz
m/s
Vhcl.Yaw
rad
Vhcl.YawAcc
rad/s^2
Vhcl.YawRate
rad/s
Vhcl.sRoad
m
Vhcl.sRoadAero
m
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
User Accessible Quantities
261
User Accessible Quantities for Vehicle Body
12.2.2
User Accessible Quantities: Car (for unexperienced users) Name
Frame
Unit
Info
Car.tx Car.ty Car.tz
Fr0
m
Translational position of vehicles connected body.
Car.vx Car.vy Car.vz
Fr1
m/s
Translational velocity of vehicle connected body.
Car.ax Car.ay Car.az
Fr1
m/s^2
Translational acceleration of vehicle connected body.
Car.v
m/s
Velocity
Car.alHori
m/s^2
Centripetal acceleration (in horizontal plane), Car.alHori is perpendicular to Car.v and to Z-axis (DIN 70000, 2.1.2.4).
Car.atHori
m/s^2
Tangential acceleration (in horizontal plane), Car.atHori is parallel to Car.v and per pendicular to Z-axis (DIN 70000, 2.1.2.5).
these are aliases for “Car.Con....”
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
User Accessible Quantities
262
User Accessible Quantities for Vehicle Body
12.2.3
User Accessible Quantities: Car Name
Frame
Unit
Info
<pos> := FL, FR, RL, RR Car.Aero.Frc_1.x Car.Aero.Frc_1.y Car.Aero.Frc_1.z
Fr1
Car.Aero.tau2_1
Fr1
Car.Aero.tau_1
Fr1
N
aerodynamics forces
Car.Aero.tau_1 + pi rad
angle of wind direction – Car.Aero.vyres Car.Aero.tau = atan ------------------------------------------– Car.Aero.vxres
Car.Aero.Trq_1.x Car.Aero.Trq_1.y Car.Aero.Trq_1.z
Fr1
Nm
aerodynamics torques at Car.Aero.Pos
Car.Aero.vres_1.x Car.Aero.vres_1.y Car.Aero.vres_1.z
Fr1
m/s
horizontal components of resultant wind flow between vehicle and surroundings
N
buffer force
m
buffer length
Car.Buffer<pos>.Frc Car.Buffer<pos>.l
Fr1
Car.C<pos>.C.t_0.x Car.C<pos>.C.t_0.y Car.C<pos>.C.t_0.z
m
Car.C<pos>.C.v_0.x Car.C<pos>.C.v_0.y Car.C<pos>.C.v_0.z
m/s
Car.C<pos>.GenFrc0
N
Car.C<pos>.GenFrc1
N
Car.C<pos>.GenInert0
kg
Car.C<pos>.GenInert1
kg
Car.C<pos>.P.t_0.x Car.C<pos>.P.t_0.y Car.C<pos>.P.t_0.z Car.C<pos>.a_0.x Car.C<pos>.a_0.y Car.C<pos>.a_0.z
Fr0
m/s^2
Car.C<pos>_rx Car.C<pos>_ry Car.C<pos>_rz
Fr1 [ZXY]
rad
rotation carrier front left (used for animation)
Car.C<pos>_tx Car.C<pos>_ty Car.C<pos>_tz
Fr1
m
translation carrier reference point front left (used for animation)
Car.C<pos>.rx_kin Car.C<pos>.ry_kin Car.C<pos>.rz_kin
Fr1 [ZXY]
rad
by kinematics
m
by kinematics
Car.C<pos>.tx_kin Car.C<pos>.ty_kin Car.C<pos>.tz_kin
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
User Accessible Quantities
263
User Accessible Quantities for Vehicle Body
Name Car.C<pos>.rx_com Car.C<pos>.ry_com Car.C<pos>.rz_com
Frame Fr1 [ZXY]
Unit
Info
rad
by compliance
m
by compliance
rad
extra, offset
Car.C<pos>.tx_ext Car.C<pos>.ty_ext Car.C<pos>.tz_ext
m
extra, offset
Car.Camber<pos>
rad
camber angle (DIN 70000, 4.1.4) Inclination of the wheel plane towards the vehicle’s longitudinal plane. Positive, if the top of the wheel is inclined towards the outside of the vehicle
Car.Con.alHori
m/s^2
centripetal acceleration (in horizontal plane), Car.alHori is perpendicular to Car.v and to Z-axis (DIN 70000, 2.1.2.4)
Car.Con.atHori
m/s^2
tangential acceleration (in horizontal plane), Car.atHori is parallel to Car.v and perpendicular to Z-axis (DIN 70000, 2.1.2.5)
Car.C<pos>.tx_com Car.C<pos>.ty_com Car.C<pos>.tz_com Car.C<pos>.rx_ext Car.C<pos>.ry_ext Car.C<pos>.rz_ext
Fr1 [ZXY]
Car.Con.ax Car.Con.ax Car.Con.ax
Fr0
translational acceleration of vehicle connected body
Car.Con.ax_1 Car.Con.ay_1 Car.Con.az_1
Fr1
translational acceleration of vehicle connected body
Car.Con.tx Car.Con.tx Car.Con.tx
Fr0
m
translational position of vehicle connected body
Car.Con.v
m/s
velocity
Car.Con.vHori
m/s
horizontal vehicle velocity (DIN 70000, 2.1.1.4) Car.vHori =
Car.Con.vx_1 Car.Con.vy_1 Car.Con.vz_1
m/s
translational velocity of vehicle connected body
Car.Damp<pos>.Frc Car.Damp<pos>.Frc_ext Car.Damp<pos>.Frc_tot
N
damper force, internal, external, total
Car.Damp<pos>.l
m
damper length
Car.Damp<pos>.v
m/s
damper velocity
m
driving distance since last test run start)
Car.Distance
Fr1
2 2 Car.vx + Car.vy
Fr0
Car.Distance =
∫ Car.v dt t
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
User Accessible Quantities
264
User Accessible Quantities for Vehicle Body
Name
Frame
Unit m/s^2
Info
Car.Fr1.ax Car.Fr1.ay Car.Fr1.az
Fr0
vehicle acceleration
Car.Fr1.rx Car.Fr1.ry Car.Fr1.rz
Fr0 rad [Z-XY]
vehicle rotation angles, Cardan angles (DIN 70000, 2.2.1.1 - 3)
Car.Fr1.tx Car.Fr1.ty Car.Fr1.tz
Fr0
m
vehicle position
Car.Fr1.vx Car.Fr1.vy Car.Fr1.vz
Fr0
m/s
translational velocity of vehicle reference point
Car.Fx<pos> Car.Fy<pos> Car.Fz<pos>
FrH
N
longitudinal, lateral and vertical ground reaction force at wheel/road contact point
Car.Gen.ax Car.Gen.ay Car.Gen.az
Fr0
m/s^2
acceleration of generalized vehicle body
Car.Gen.ax_1 Car.Gen.ay_1 Car.Gen.az_1
Fr1
m/s^2
acceleration of generalized vehicle body
Car.Gen.tx Car.Gen.ty Car.Gen.tz
Fr0
m
position of generalized vehicle body
Car.Gen.vx_1 Car.Gen.vy_1 Car.Gen.vz_1
Fr1
m/s
velocity of generalized vehicle body
Car.Hitch.Frc2Car.x Car.Hitch.Frc2Car.y Car.Hitch.Frc2Car.z
Fr0
trailer hitch force and torque acting on car
Car.Hitch.Trq2Car.x Car.Hitch.Trq2Car.y Car.Hitch.Trq2Car.z
trailer hitch force and torque acting on car
Car.Hitch.tx Car.Hitch.ty Car.Hitch.tz
Fr0
m
trailer hitch position (hitch center reference point)
Car.Hitch.vx Car.Hitch.vy Car.Hitch.vz
Fr0
m/s
trailer hitch velocity (hitch center reference point)
Car.InclinAngle<pos>
Fr1
rad
inclination angle Angle between Z-axis and wheel plane. Positive for positive rotation around Xaxis of the wheel.
Car.Jack.Fz<pos>
N
Car.Jack.tz<pos
m
Car.Load..mass
kg
mass of car load, := 0, 1, 2
m
position of i-th car load, i= 0..2
Car.Load..tx Car.Load..ty Car.Load..tz
CarMaker Reference Manual
Fr1
Version 2.1.6
User Accessible Quantities
265
User Accessible Quantities for Vehicle Body
Name
Frame
Unit
Info
Car.LongSlip<pos>
–
Longitudinal slip. Definition depends on tire model.
Car.muRoad<pos>
–
road friction coefficient
Car.Pitch
rad
vehicle pitch angle (DIN 70000, 2.2.1.2) Positive, if front goes down and rear of the car comes up.
Car.PitchVel
rad/s
Car.RoadCoord
m
vehicle road coordinate (carrier front left)
Car.RoadDist<pos>
m
road (center line) coordinate of belonging wheel
Car.Roll
rad
vehicle roll angle (DIN 70000, 2.2.1.3) Positive, if right side goes down and left side comes up.
Car.RollVel
rad/s
roll rotation velocity
Car.SideSlipAngle
rad
sideslip angle (DIN 70000, 2.2.1.4) Angle between X-axis of the car and direction of Car.vHori
Car.vy Car.SideSlipAngle = atan ----------------Car.vx Car.SideSlipAngle = 0 if Car.vx = Car.vy = 0
value range -pi .. +pi Car.SideSlipAngle2
sideslip angle, value range 0 ... 2 pi
Car.SideSlipAngleVel
sideslip angle velocity (DIN 70000, 2.2.1.4)
Car.SimPhase
–
car simulation phase
Car.SlipAngle<pos>
rad
slip angle (DIN 70000, 7.1.2) Angle between X-axis of the wheel and the tangent of the trajectory of the center of tire contact. Positive for positive rotation around Z-axis.
Car.vyFL Car.SlipAngleFL = atan -----------------------Car.vxFL Car.SlipAngleFL = 0 if Car.vxFL = Car.vyFL = 0
Car.SpinAngle<pos>
rad
angle arround wheel spin axis, 3. angle (DIN 70000, 4.1.3.1)
Car.Spring<pos>.Frc Car.Spring<pos>.Frc_ext Car.Spring<pos>.Frc_tot
N
spring force, internal, external, total
Car.Spring<pos>.l
m
spring length
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
User Accessible Quantities
266
User Accessible Quantities for Vehicle Body
Name
Frame
Unit
Info
Car.SSAngle
rad
sensor signal of sideslip angle
Car.Stabi<pos>.Frc Car.Stabi<pos>.Frc_ext Car.Stabi<pos>.Frc_tot
N
stabilizer force, internal, external, total
Car.Stabi<pos>.l
m
stabilizer length
Car.T<pos>.Trq.y
Nm
tire torque around wheel spin axis
Car.Toe<pos>
rad
toe angle (DIN 70000, 4.1.5.1) The toe angle is positive if the front section of the wheel is turned toward the vehicle’s longitudinal center plane and is negative (toe-out) if the front section is turned away from this plane.
Car.TrackCurv
1/m
curvature of trajectory (DIN 70000, 2.3.3) Car.TrackCurv = 1 / Car.TrackRadius Car.TrackCurv = 0 if Car.TrackRadius = ∞
Car.TrackCurv = 0 Car.TrackRadius
m
∞
if Car.TrackRadius =
radius of path / trajectory (DIN 70000, 2.3.2) Distance between a point of the trajectory and the belonging instantaneous center.
2 ( Car.vHori ) Car.TrackRadius = --------------------------------Car.alHori Car.TrackRadius = ∞ if Car.alHori = 0
Car.TrqAlign<pos>
Nm
aligning torque (DIN 70000, 7.3.2.3) Component of the ground reaction moment. Positive for positive direction around Z-axis
Car.Trq_T2W<pos>
Nm
tire torque around wheel spin axis
Car.v<pos>
m/s
wheel velocity (based on wheel rotation and wheel radius) Car.vFL = Car.WheelSpd_FL
⋅ Car.WFL_KinRollRadius
Car.Virtual.Frc_0.x Car.Virtual.Frc_0.y Car.Virtual.Frc_0.z
Fr0
N
virtual force, defined in Fr0
Car.Virtual.Frc_1.x Car.Virtual.Frc_1.y Car.Virtual.Frc_1.z
Fr1
N
virtual force, defined in Fr1
Car.Virtual.Trq_0.x Car.Virtual.Trq_0.y Car.Virtual.Trq_0.z
Fr0
Nm
virtual torque, defined in Fr0
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
User Accessible Quantities
267
User Accessible Quantities for Vehicle Body
Name Car.Virtual.Trq_1.x Car.Virtual.Trq_1.y Car.Virtual.Trq_1.z
Frame
Info
Nm
virtual torque, defined in Fr1
Car.vx<pos>
m/s
longitudinal wheel velocity
Car.vy<pos>
m/s
lateral wheel velocity
Car.W<pos>.Radius
m
actual wheel radius (distance road to wheel center)
Car.W<pos>.rot
rad
wheel rotation angle
Car.WheelSpd_<pos>
rad/s
rotational wheel velocity
Car.Yaw
rad
vehicle yaw angle (DIN 70000, 2.2.1.1) Angle between X-axis of the car and Xaxis of earth fixed system. Positive for positive rotation around Z-axis.
Car.YawAcc
rad/s^2
vehicle yaw acceleration
Car.YawRate
rad/s
vehicle yaw velocity (DIN 70000, 2.2.2.1)
CarMaker Reference Manual
Fr1
Unit
Version 2.1.6
User Accessible Quantities
268
User Accessible Quantities: Power Train
12.3
User Accessible Quantities: Power Train
12.3.1
User Accessible Quantities for PowerTrain Name
Unit
Info
<pos> := FL, FR, RL, RR
12.3.2
PT.Trq_Sup2Bdy1.y
Nm
PT.W<pos>.rot
rad
rotation angle of wheel
PT.W<pos>.rotv
rad/s
rotation speed of wheel
PT.W<pos>.TrqDrive
Nm
drive torque of wheel
PT.W<pos>.Trq_B2W
Nm
torque acting from brake to wheel
User Accessible Quantities for PowerTrain ‘Generic’ Name
Unit
Info
PT.Gen.DL.FDiff.Trq_ext2in
Nm
torque to differential input shaft
PT.Gen.DL.FDiff.Trq_Cpl2B
Nm
torque from coupling model to shaft B
PT.Gen.DL.FDiff.rotv_in
rad/sec
rotation speed, input shaft
PT.Gen.DL.FDiff.DVA.Trq_A2B
Nm
used for coupling model ‘DVA’
PT.Gen.DL.RDiff.Trq_ext2in
Nm
torque to differential input shaft
PT.Gen.DL.RDiff.Trq_Cpl2B
Nm
torque from coupling model to shaft B
PT.Gen.DL.RDiff.rotv_in
rad/sec
rotation speed, input shaft
PT.Gen.DL.RDiff.DVA.Trq_A2B
Nm
used for coupling model ‘DVA’
PT.Gen.DL.CDiff.Trq_ext2in
Nm
torque to differential input shaft
PT.Gen.DL.CDiff.Trq_Cpl2B
Nm
torque from coupling model to shaft B
PT.Gen.DL.CDiff.rotv_in
rad/sec
rotation speed, input shaft
PT.Gen.DL.CDiff.DVA.Trq_A2B
Nm
used for coupling model ‘DVA’
PT.Gen.DL.HangOn.Trq_Cpl2B
Nm
torque from coupling model to shaft B (output)
PT.Gen.DL.HangOn.drotv_Diff2o
rad/sec
delta rotation speed (HangOn - DiffIn)
PT.Gen.DL.HangOn.DVA.Trq_A2B
Nm
used for coupling model ‘DVA’
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
User Accessible Quantities
269
User Accessible Quantities: Power Train
12.3.3
User Accessible Quantities for Module ‘Engine’ Name
Info
PT.Engine.rot
rad
rotation angle
PT.Engine.rotv
rad/s
rotation speed
PT.Engine.Trq
Nm
effective engine output torque
PT.Engine.Starter
engine starter currently active
PT.Engine.on
engine is running
PT.Engine.DVA.Trq.Amplify
12.3.4
Unit
Nm
used for engine model ‘DVA’
User Accessible Quantities for Module ‘Clutch’ Name
Unit
Info
PT.Clutch.rot_in
rad
rotation angle, input shaft
PT.Clutch.rot_out
rad
rotation angle, output shaft
PT.Clutch.rotv_in
rad/s
rotation speed, input shaft
PT.Clutch.rotv_out
rad/s
rotation speed, output shaft
PT.Clutch.Trq_E2C
Nm
torque transferred from engine to clutch (input torque)
PT.Clutch.Trq_C2GB
Nm
torque transferred from clutch to gearbox (output torque)
PT.Clutch.DVA.Trq_A2B
Nm
used for clutch model ‘DVA’
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
User Accessible Quantities
270
User Accessible Quantities: Power Train
12.3.5
User Accessible Quantities for Module ‘GearBox’ Name
Unit
Info
PT.GearBox.rot_in
rad
rotation angle, input shaft
PT.GearBox.rot_out
rad
rotation angle, output shaft
PT.GearBox.rotv_in
rad/s
rotation speed, input shaft
PT.GearBox.rotv_out
rad/s
rotation speed, output shaft
PT.GearBox.Trq_C2GB
Nm
torque transferred from clutch to gearbox (input torque)
PT.GearBox.Trq_ext2GBout
Nm
torque transferred from external to gearbox output and driveline. This torque is contained in quantity Trq_GB2DL (output torque)
PT.GearBox.Trq_GB2DL
Nm
torque transferred from gearbox to driveline (output torque)
PT.GearBox.i
current transmission ratio
PT.GearBox.GearNo
gear number currently used
PT.GearBox.DVA.i
used for gearbox model ‘DVA’
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
User Accessible Quantities
271
User Accessible Quantities: Steering Systems
12.4
User Accessible Quantities: Steering Systems
12.4.1
General User Accessible Quantities: Steering Systems Name
Unit
Info
Steer.L.Frc
N
External force from left suspension to steer system.
Steer.L.Inert
kg
Inertia (mass) from left suspension which is considered in differential equations of the steer system.
Steer.L.iSteer2q
m/rad
Translation steering wheel angle to generalized steer coordinate on left side.
Steer.L.q
m
Generalized steer coordinate for the left suspension.
Steer.L.qp
m/s
Generalized steer velocity for the left suspension.
Steer.L.qpp
m/s^2
Generalized steer acceleration for the left suspension.
Steer.R.Frc
N
External force from right suspension to steer system.
Steer.R.Inert
kg
Inertia (mass) from right suspension which is considered in differential equations of the steer system.
Steer.R.iSteer2q
m/rad
Translation steering wheel angle to generalized steer coordinate on right side.
Steer.R.q
m
Generalized steer coordinate for the right suspension.
Steer.R.qp
m/s
Generalized steer velocity for the right suspension.
Steer.R.qpp
m/s^2
Generalized steer acceleration for the right suspension.
Steer.SteerBy
[0..2]
Type of steering mode. 1 Steer by Angle, 2 Steer by Torque.
Steer.WhlAng
rad
Steering wheel angle.
Steer.WhlVel
rad/s
Steering wheel velocity.
Steer.WhlAcc
rad/s^2
Steering wheel acceleration.
Steer.WhlTrq
Nm
Steering wheel torque.
Steer.WhlTrqStatic
Nm
Steering wheel torque required for static conditions (no accelerations).
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
User Accessible Quantities
272
User Accessible Quantities: Brake System
12.5
User Accessible Quantities: Brake System
12.5.1
General User Accessible Quantities for Brake Systems Name
Unit
Booster activation signal (0..1)
Brake.BooSignal
Brake.DiaphTravel
Info
m
Travel of the booster diaphragm Brake pedal actuation (0..1)
Brake.Pedal Brake.PedFrc
N
Force applied on brake pedal
Brake.PedTravel
m
Brake pedal travel
Brake.PistTravel
m
Travel of brake piston Park brake actuation (0..1)
Brake.Park
Brake.pMC
bar
Master cylinder pressure
Brake.pMC_in
bar
Input of master cylinder pressure to hydraulic model if input mode ‘Use_pMCInput’ ist selected in the brake interface. Hydraulic pump activated
Brake.PumpIsOn Brake.PuRetVolt
V
Hydraulic pump return voltage
Brake.pWB_FL
bar
Brake pressure front left
Brake.pWB_FR
bar
Brake pressure front right
Brake.pWB_RL
bar
Brake pressure rear left
Brake.pWB_RR
bar
Brake pressure rear right Brake booster release switch actuated
Brake.Rel_SW
Brake.T_env
K
Environment temperature for brake
Brake.Trq_FL
Nm
Brake torque front left
Brake.Trq_FR
Nm
Brake torque front right
Brake.Trq_RL
Nm
Brake torque rear left
Brake.Trq_RR
Nm
Brake torque rear right
Brake.Trq_PB_FL
Nm
Brake torque of park brake front left
Brake.Trq_PB_FR
Nm
Brake torque of park brake front right
Brake.Trq_PB_RL
Nm
Brake torque of park brake rear left
Brake.Trq_PB_RR
Nm
Brake torque of park brake rear right
Brake.Trq_FL_ext
Nm
External brake torque front left
Brake.Trq_FR_ext
Nm
External brake torque front right
Brake.Trq_RL_ext
Nm
External brake torque rear left
Brake.Trq_RR _ext
Nm
External brake torque rear right
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
User Accessible Quantities
273
User Accessible Quantities: Brake System
Name
Unit
Info
Brake.Trq_FL_tot
Nm
Total brake torque (trq+trq_park+ trq_ext) front left
Brake.Trq_FR_tot
Nm
Total brake torque (trq+trq_park+ trq_ext) front right
Brake.Trq_RL_tot
Nm
Total brake torque rear left (trq+trq_park+ trq_ext)
Brake.Trq_RR _tot
Nm
Total brake torque rear right (trq+trq_park+ trq_ext)
Brake.Valve_In_FL
Valve activity for inlet valve front left (0..1)
Brake.Valve_In_FR
Valve activity for inlet valve front right (0..1)
Brake.Valve_In_RL
Valve activity for inlet valve rear left (0..1)
Brake.Valve_In_RR
Valve activity for inlet valve rear right (0..1)
Brake.Valve_Out_FL
Valve activity for outlet valve front left (0..1)
Brake.Valve_Out_FR
Valve activity for outlet valve front right (0..1)
Brake.Valve_Out_RL
Valve activity for outlet valve rear left (0..1)
Brake.Valve_Out_RR
Valve activity for outlet valve rear right (0..1)
Brake.Valve_PV_0
Valve activity for pilot valve 0
Brake.Valve_PV_1
Valve activity for pilot valve 1
Brake.Valve_SV_0
Valve activity for suction valve 0
Brake.Valve_SV_1
Valve activity for suction valve 1
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
User Accessible Quantities
274
User Accessible Quantities: Brake System
12.5.2
User Accessible Quantities for Brake Module ‘HydESP’ Name
Unit
Info
Brake.HydESP.Att_0.p
bar
Pressure of Attenuator 0
Brake.HydESP.Att_1.p
bar
Pressure of Attenuator 1
Brake.HydESP.LPA_0.p
bar
Pressure of low pressure accumulator 0
Brake.HydESP.LPA_1.p
bar
Pressure of low pressure accumulator 1
Brake.HydESP.SuppL_0.p
bar
Pressure of supply line 0
Brake.HydESP.Cyl_p_FL
bar
Pressure of brake cylinder front left
Brake.HydESP.Cyl_p_FR
bar
Pressure of brake cylinder front right
Brake.HydESP.Cyl_p_RL
bar
Pressure of brake cylinder rear left
Brake.HydESP.Cyl_p_RR
bar
Pressure of brake cylinder rear right
m
3
Volume of brake cylinder front left
m
3
Volume of brake cylinder front righ
m
3
Volume of brake cylinder rear left
Brake.HydESP.Cyl_v_RR
m
3
Volume of brake cylinder rear right
Brake.HydESP.SuppL_1.p
bar
Pressure of supply line 1
Brake.HydESP.nPump
1/s
Rotation speed of hydraulic pump engine
Brake.HydESP.qIN_FL
m ⁄s
Brake.HydESP.Cyl_v_FL Brake.HydESP.Cyl_v_FR Brake.HydESP.Cyl_v_RL
Brake.HydESP.qIN_FR Brake.HydESP.qIN_RL
3
Volume flow through inlet valve front left
3
Volume flow through inlet valve front right
3
Volume flow through inlet valve rear left
3
m ⁄s m ⁄s
Brake.HydESP.qIN_RR
m ⁄s
Volume flow through inlet valve rear right
Brake.HydESP.qOUT_FL
m ⁄s
3
Volume flow through outlet valve front left
3
Volume flow through outlet valve front right
3
Volume flow through outlet valve rear left
3
Volume flow through outlet valve rear right
Brake.HydESP.qOUT_FR Brake.HydESP.qOUT_RL
m ⁄s m ⁄s
Brake.HydESP.qOUT_RR
m ⁄s
Brake.HydESP.qPV_0
m ⁄s
3
Volume flow through pilot valve 0 see section ’CircuitConfig’
Brake.HydESP.qPV_1
m ⁄s
3
Volume flow through pilot valve 1 see section ’CircuitConfig’
Brake.HydESP.qPu_0
m ⁄s
3
Volume flow through hydraulic pump 0
3
Volume flow through hydraulic pump 1
Brake.HydESP.qPu_1
m ⁄s
Brake.HydESP.qSV_0
m ⁄s
3
Volume flow through suction valve 0
3
Volume flow through suction valve 1
Brake.HydESP.qSV_1
CarMaker Reference Manual
m ⁄s
Version 2.1.6
User Accessible Quantities
275
User Accessible Quantities: Trailer
12.6
User Accessible Quantities: Trailer
12.6.1
General User Accessible Quantities: Trailer Name
Frame
Unit
Info True (1) if trailermodel is active (driving with trailer)
Tr.Active Tr.Aero.Frc_1.x Tr.Aero.Frc_1.y Tr.Aero.Frc_1.z
Fr1
Tr.Aero.Trq_1.x Tr.Aero.Trq_1.y Tr.Aero.Trq_1.z
Fr1
Tr.Aero.tau_1
Fr1
rad
Angle of incidence
Tr.Aero.tau2_1
Fr1
rad
Angle of incidence (shifted by 2π)
Tr.Aero.vres_1.x Tr.Aero.vres_1.y Tr.Aero.vres_1.z
Fr1
m/s
Wind velocity
Tr.C<pos>.tx Tr.C<pos>.ty Tr.C<pos>.tz
Fr1
m
Translation carrier reference point front left (used for animation) <pos> = FL, FR, RL, RR
rad
Rotation carrier front left (used for animation) <pos> = FL, FR, RL, RR
Tr.C<pos>.rx Tr.C<pos>.ry Tr.C<pos>.rz
m
Aerodynamic force acting on trailer
Aerodynamic torque
Tr.C<pos>.C.t_0.x Tr.C<pos>.C.t_0.y Tr.C<pos>.C.t_0.z
Fr0
m
wheel center C
Tr.C<pos>.P.t_0.x Tr.C<pos>.P.t_0.y Tr.C<pos>.P.t_0.z
Fr0
m
wheel road contact point P
Tr.Con.ax Tr.Con.ay Tr.Con.az
Fr0
m/s^2
Center of mass, translational acceleration
Tr.Con.ax_1 Tr.Con.ay_1 Tr.Con.az_1
Fr1
m/s^2
Center of mass, translational acceleration
Tr.Con.tx Tr.Con.ty Tr.Con.tz
Fr0
m
Center of mass, translational position
Tr.Con.vx Tr.Con.vy Tr.Con.vz
Fr0
m/s
Center of mass, translational velocity
Tr.CoM.vx_1 Tr.CoM.vy_1 Tr.CoM.vz_1
Fr1
m/s
Center of mass, translational velocity
Tr.Fr1.ax Tr.Fr1.ay Tr.Fr1.az
Fr0
m/s^2
Translational acceleration
Tr.Fr1.rx Tr.Fr1.ry Tr.Fr1.rz
CarMaker Reference Manual
Trailer rotation angles, Cardan angles, whereby Tr.rz = Tr.Yaw.ry = Car.Pitch and Car.rz = Car.Roll (DIN 70000, 2.2.1.1 - 3)
Version 2.1.6
User Accessible Quantities
276
User Accessible Quantities: Trailer
Name
Frame
Unit
Info
Tr.Fr1.tx Tr.Fr1.ty Tr.Fr1.tz
Fr0
m
Translational position
Tr.Fr1.vx Tr.Fr1.vy Tr.Fr1.vz
Fr0
m/s
Translational velocity
Tr.Fx<pos> Tr.Fy<pos> Tr.Fz<pos>
FrH
N
longitudinal, lateral and vertical ground reaction force at wheel/road contact point
Tr.Hitch.Frc2Tr.x Tr.Hitch.Frc2Tr.y Tr.Hitch.Frc2Tr.z
Fr0
Hitch force from external (car) to trailer
Tr.Hitch.Frc2Tr.x_1 Tr.Hitch.Frc2Tr.y_1 Tr.Hitch.Frc2Tr.z_1
Fr1
Hitch force from external (car) to trailer
Tr.Hitch.Trq2Tr.x Tr.Hitch.Trq2Tr.y Tr.Hitch.Trq2Tr.z
Fr0
Hitch torque from external (car) to trailer
Tr.Hitch.Trq2Tr.x_1 Tr.Hitch.Trq2Tr.y_1 Tr.Hitch.Trq2Tr.z_1
Fr1
Hitch torque from external (car) to trailer
Tr.Hitch.tx Tr.Hitch.ty Tr.Hitch.tz
Fr0
Hitch translational position
Tr.Hitch.vx Tr.Hitch.vy Tr.Hitch.vz
Fr0
Hitch translational velocity
kg
Mass of load, := 0, 1, 2
m
Position of i-th load, i= 0..2
Tr.LongSlip<pos>
–
Longitudinal slip
Tr.Pitch
rad
Trailer pitch angle (DIN 70000, 2.2.1.1) Positive, if front goes down and rear of trailer comes up.
Tr.Roll
rad
Trailer roll angle (DIN 70000, 2.2.1.3) Positive, if right side goes down and left side comes up.
Tr.SideSlipAngle
rad
Sideslip angle (DIN 70000, 2.2.1.4)
Tr.SideSlipAngle2
rad
Sideslip angle with an offset of 2*PI
Tr.SideSlipAngleVel
rad/s
Sideslip angle velocity (DIN 70000, 2.2.1.4)
Tr.Load..mass Tr.Load..tx Tr.Load..ty Tr.Load..tz
Fr1
simulation phase
Tr.SimPhase Tr.TrqBrake<pos>
Nm
Brake torque o
Tr.Virtual.Frc_0.x Tr.Virtual.Frc_0.y Tr.Virtual.Frc_0.z
Fr0
N
Virtual force acting to trailer body from external
Tr.Virtual.Frc_1.x Tr.Virtual.Frc_1.y Tr.Virtual.Frc_1.z
Fr1
N
Virtual force acting to trailer body from external
Tr.Virtual.Trq_0.x Tr.Virtual.Trq_0.y Tr.Virtual.Trq_0.z
Fr0
Nm
Virtual torque acting to trailer body from external
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
User Accessible Quantities
277
User Accessible Quantities: Trailer
Name
Frame
Info
Nm
Virtual torque acting to trailer body from external
Tr.W<pos>.rot
rad
Wheel rotation angle around wheel spin axis
Tr.WheelSpd_<pos>
rad/s
Rotational wheel velocity
Tr.Yaw
rad
yaw angle (DIN 70000, 2.2.1.1) Angle between Xaxis of trailer and X-axis of earth fixed system. Positive for positive rotation around Z-axis.
Tr.YawVel
rad/s
yaw angle velocity (DIN 70000, 2.2.2.1)
Tr.alHori
m/s^2
horizontal lateral acceleration
Tr.atHori
m/s^2
horizontal tangential acceleration
m/s^2
acceleration
Tr.dr_z_0
rad
Yaw angle difference between trailer and tractor
Tr.drv_z_0
rad/s
Yaw angle velocity difference between trailer and tractor
Tr.sRoad
m
Trailer road coordinate
Tr.Virtual.Trq_1.x Tr.Virtual.Trq_1.y Tr.Virtual.Trq_1.z
Tr.ax Tr.ay Tr.az
Tr.tx Tr.ty Tr.tz
Fr1
Unit
Fr1
Fr0
m/s
Tr.v<pos> Tr.vx Tr.vy Tr.vz
CarMaker Reference Manual
m
Fr1
Wheel velocity (based on wheel rotation and wheel radius)
m/s
Version 2.1.6
User Accessible Quantities
278
UAQ´s changed from CM 2.0 to CM 2.1
12.7
UAQ´s changed from CM 2.0 to CM 2.1 ✘
means this quantity does not exist (any more) Table 12.1: Changed or Renamed UAQ´s from CarMaker 2.0 to CarMaker 2.1
Old UAQ (CM2.0)
New UAQ (CM2.1)
✘
Ambient.AirDensity
✘
Ambient.AirPressure
✘
Ambient.AirHumidity
✘
Ambient.WindVel_ext.<xyz>
Brake.FPedal
✘
✘
Brake.HydESP.In_
✘
Brake.HydESP.Out_
✘
Brake.HydESP.PV_<0|1>
✘
Brake.HydESP.SV_<0|1>
✘
Brake.Park
✘
Brake.PedFrc
✘
Brake.Pedal
✘
Brake.Trq__ext
Brake.Trq_
Brake.Trq__tot
✘
Brake.Trq_PB_
✘
Brake.Trq_WB_
Car.Con.v<xyz>
✘
Car.Gen.v<xyz>
✘
Car.SpinAngle
✘
Car.Axle.Frc
✘
Car.Camera_<xyz>
✘
Car.C.CoM_0.t.<xyz>
Car.C.C.t_0.<xyz>
car.C.CoM_0.v.<xyz>
Car.C.C.v_0.<xyz>
Car.C.P_0.<xyz>
Car.C.P.t_0.<xyz>
✘
Car.C.P.v01_H.<xyz>
Car.C.a_0.z
Car.C.a_0.<xyz>
✘
Car.vz
✘
Car.C.t<xyz>_ext (extra)
✘
Car.C.r<xyz>_comp (compliance)
✘
Car.C.t<xyz>_comp
✘
Car.Aero.vres_1.z
✘
Car.Buffer.l_ext
✘
Car.Spring.l_ext
✘
Car.Stabi.l_ext
DM.BrakeLever
✘
DM.FBrake
✘
DM.BrakePedal
✘
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
User Accessible Quantities
279
UAQ´s changed from CM 2.0 to CM 2.1
Table 12.1: Changed or Renamed UAQ´s from CarMaker 2.0 to CarMaker 2.1 Old UAQ (CM2.0)
New UAQ (CM2.1)
DM.BrakePedalFrc
✘
✘
DM.Brake
DM.HandBrake
DM.BrakePark
✘
DM.ExtInp.Mode
✘
DM.SpeedTrap.Dist
✘
DM.SpeedTrap.Id
✘
DM.SpeedTrap.Time
✘
DVA.nQuants
SC.HeapSize
✘
SC.HeapSizeModifiedNo
✘
✘
SC.RunCtrl
✘
SC.DStore.State
✘
DStore.Status
✘
DStore.FileNo
✘
DStore.SavedSize
✘
PT.Clutch.DVA.Trq_A2B
✘
PT.GB.DVA.i
PT.Gen.DL.CDiff.DVA.Trq_A2B
✘
PT.Gen.DL.FDiff.DVA.Trq_A2B
✘
PT.Gen.DL.RDiff.DVA.Trq_A2B
✘
Sensor.One.Acc.<xyz>_1
✘
✘
Tr.Aero.vres_1.z
✘
Tr.C.P_0.<xyz>
✘
Tr.C.C_0.<xyz>
✘
Tr.Con.a<xyz>
✘
Tr.Con.a<xyz>_1
✘
Tr.Con.t<xyz>
✘
Tr.Con.v
✘
Tr.Con.vHori
✘
Tr.Con.v<xyz>
✘
Tr.Con.v<xyz>_1
✘
Tr.Hitch.Frc2Tr.<xyz>_1
✘
Tr.aHori
✘
Tr.a<xyz>
✘
Tr.t<xyz>
✘
Tr.v<xyz>
Tr.CoM.a<xyz>
✘
Tr.CoM.a<xyz>_1
✘
Tr.CoM.v<xyz>
✘
Tr.CoM.v<xyz>_1
✘
Tr.CoM.v
✘
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
User Accessible Quantities
280
UAQ´s changed from CM 2.0 to CM 2.1
Table 12.1: Changed or Renamed UAQ´s from CarMaker 2.0 to CarMaker 2.1 Old UAQ (CM2.0)
New UAQ (CM2.1)
Tr.CoM.t<xyz>
✘
✘
Vhcl.Roll
✘
Vhcl.RollAcc
✘
Vhcl.RollVel
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
281
Appendix
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
282
Appendix A
Mini-Maneuver Command Language
This section explain the mini-maneuver command language. The mini-maneuver command language is a small group of commands that can be added directly to the CarMaker maneuver dialog window and that will be executed during a minimaneuver. There are commands that change parameter files, operate the FailSafeTester and commands that perform a number of other useful operations. Mini maneuver commands are stored in the testrun file as an text entry with the mini maneuver prefix <MMPre> followed by “Cmds”.
A.1
Syntax Comment lines start with a ‘#’ character and are ignored by the interpreter. All other lines are interpreted as commands. The execution of minimaneuver commands can be defined by conditions. When the condition gets true the following command is executed. A condition is notated in front of a command. If no condition is specified the command is executed at the beginning of the minimaneuver. [Time=TimeVal] [Dist=DistVal] CmdStr Argument
Description
TimeVal
Specifies the time offset from the beginning of the minimaneuver when the succeeding commands should execute.
DistVal
Specifies the distance the vehicle traveled from the beginning of the minimaneuver when the succeeding commands should execute.
CmdStr
the mini maneuver command string
Specify time and/or distance statement to trigger the start of evaluation of succeeding commands.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
283
When specifying Time and Dist in conjunction the succeeding commands are executed when one of the two conditions gets true.
Example
Time=0.5 Dist=50 DMjmpn 2
The succeeding command (jump to minimaneuver 2) is executed 0.5 seconds after the beginning of the minimaneuver or 50 meters measured from the beginning of the minimaneuver depending which case happens first.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
284
A.2
Driving Maneuver Commands With the driving maneuver commands it is possible to influence the standard top down execution order of minimaneuvers. Additionally it is possible to manipulate the starting point of the external inputs from file functionality.
Driving Maneuver Label Label
LabelStr
Define a label with the name LabelStr. A jump to this minimaneuver can be realized by referencing this label (see next command).
Driving Maneuver Jump DMjmp DMjmpn
LabelStr LabelNo
Jump to mini maneuver with the label . The label has to be set in the desired minimaneuver with the Label command. Alternatively the identifier number of the minimaneuver can be specified directly without defining a label.
Driving Maneuver External Inputs from File ExtInp file
ModeStr
Modify the CarMaker standard behavior of reading inputs from file from the beginning of a simulation. With this command is possible to define the point when to start input from file. This can either be at the beginning of a minimaneuver or in combination with the Time and Dist conditions somewhere during a minimaneuver. The parameter ModeStr specifies the following actions: ModeStr
Description
enable
Enable input from file. If this is the first instance of this command the input from file starts at this place.
disable
Disable input from file. This can be used as a interrupt function. The internal time used for input from file continues to count up but the values are not updated in CarMaker. Any further ’enable’ commands make sure that the values are updated in CarMaker again.
restart
With this parameter it is possible to rewind the timeline of the input from file module. Behavior is like the first start of input from file then.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
285
A.3
Direct Variable Access Commands DVA makes it possible to access all quantities of the CarMaker data dictionary. The following commands provide DVA functionality within a minimaneuver.
Write Access – DVAwr DVAwr <Mode> [Val2] [nCyclesRamp] Argument
Description
Name of the quantity to access via DVA
<Mode>
Abs, Off, Fac, FacOff, AbsRamp, OffRamp, FacRamp, FacOffRamp
IO_In, IO_Out, DM
Number of cycles the selected quantity should be overwritten
Value to be used for DVA
Used to specify offset or ramp in some modes
Used to specify number of cycles used for the ramp
This command can be used to overwrite quantities via DVA access. •
There can be several modes used for modification of DVA quotients:
Mode
Description
Abs
specifies the absolute value to overwrite the quantity.
Off
specifies an offset which is added to the current value of the quantity.
Fac
specifies a factor the current value of the quantity is multiplied with.
FacOff
Combination of the cases ’factor’ and ’offset’ above. specifies the factor, specifies the offset.
AbsRamp
Specifies absolute value in and the number of cycles to be used to fade to this value.
OffRamp
Specifies the offset value to be added to the current value of the selected quantity in and the number of cycles to be used to reach the given offset.
FacRamp
Specifies the factor the current value of the selected quantity is multiplied with in and the number of cycles to be used to fade to reach the given factor.
FacOffRamp
Specifies the offset value to be added to the current value of the selected quantity in , the factor the current value of the selected quantity is multiplied with in and the number of cycles to be used to reach the given factor and offset.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
286
•
Beside the mode the access point of the DVA write command has to be specified:
Access Point
Description
IO_In
The quantity is overwritten by DVA after execution of the IO_In function (read input from hardware modules).
IO_Out
The quantity is overwritten by DVA before execution of the IO_Out function (write input to hardware modules).
DM
The quantity is overwritten by DVA after execution of the DM function (Driving Manager).
•
The number of cycles selects how long the quantity should be overwritten. If a mode type ’ramp’ is specified has priority over .
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
287
A.4
Action Commands Beside the modification of CarMaker quantities via DVA it is possible to perform certain pervasive actions with special commands.
Kl15 Kl15=<0/1>
Switch Kl15 (ignition) on or off. Example
Kl15=1 Switch ignition on.
Kl50 Kl50=<0/1>
Switch Kl50/StarterControl on or off. If in the first minimaneuver a KL50=0 command is specified the automatic start of the engine is disabled. The user is responsible for turning on the ignition and then activate the starter (Kl50) for a while until the engine idles stable. After that Kl50 should be set to 0 again. Example
Kl50=1
Switch ignition on.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
288
A.5
Logging Commands The mini command language provides basic functionality to issue messages to the CarMaker session log.
Log Log LogWrnS LogErrS
<Msg> <Msg> <Msg>
This command issues messages (string embedded in quotes) to the session log. The following types of messages are distinguished: Type
Description
Log
Issue a log message. The message is specified in [Msg].
LogWrnS
Issue a warning message. The message is specified in [Msg].
LogErrS
Issue a error message. The message is specified in [Msg].
Example
Log
“This is my own logging message”
The class of warning and error messages is always EC_General.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
289
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
290
A.6
FailSafeTester Commands The Mini-Maneuver Command Language provides access to the FailSafeTester. This enables the user to apply a specific (failsafe-)test with precise timings and conditions evaluated in the realtime context of the simulation. The Mini-Maneuver FailSaveTester commands can be found in the Users Guide in section 12.6.2 ’FailSafeTester Commands with Mini-Maneuvers’ on page 105.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
291
Appendix B
Traffic-Obstacles
In this section, the module traffic-obstacle is discussed (not to be confused with roadobstacles). It is a module to define, handle and calculate obstacles of traffic, a module to do traffic flow simulation in the environment of vehicle dynamics simulation. In many applications, it is convenient to consider the motion of an individual obstacle being composed of two parts: first, the nominal motion, second the — in general small — perturbed motion. Several options might be considered in characterizing the gross motion. The gross motion of the obstacle is described most naturally by the motion of a frame moving along the mid-line of the road with variable velocity v . This frame also performs angular motion with a certain angular velocity to maintain it’s orientation with respect to the road in form of the latter curves.
t4 t3 t2 t1
An obstacle •
is a three dimensional box with width, height, length, position and orientation,
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
292
•
can move or be fixed (driving or parking cars, motorcycles, roadworks)
•
exists only for a period of time
•
can randomly appear and disappear,
•
has the following motion attributes -
maximal velocity
-
maximal longitudinal acceleration and deceleration
-
maximal lateral acceleration
The motion of an obstacle is defined along the course coordinate. It consists of a nominal, basic motion, superimposed with a lateral motion and of time dependent perturbed offsets in both directions.
v Road nominal
t Road s perturbed
IPG-ROAD t Road
s RoadCoord
The longitudinal motion is typically defined by a velocity table. The default for lateral behavior is to keep the initial lateral position. That means that the obstacle has always the same lateral distance to the middle of the lane. The superposed longitudinal and lateral behavior can be created by random, sinus or square functions. The obstacle module interacts directly with IPG-ROAD to get the corresponding absolute position and orientation.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
293
The obstacle module provides the absolute state of all defined obstacles. In a second step,
RelVel RelAcc Vel Acc
Sensor dist
ance
s RoadCoord s obst
s PoI
relative quantities are calculated. For example, an Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) controller needs the distance, the direction from the sensor to and the relative velocity and acceleration of the obstacle are needed.
Restrictions in this program version •
An obstacle can move through another obstacle. It doesn’t stop in front of or pass the other obstacle.
•
Obstacles don’t reduce there velocity in curves to stay in the allowed range of lateral acceleration.
•
Hill tops or fog between the obstacle and the sensor are ignored. The sensor can always see the obstacle.
•
The angle between sensor direction and the obstacle is related to the center of the obstacle. Its dimension is ignored.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
294
B.1
Parameters and Quantities Units in this module m rad s m⁄s 2 m⁄s
distance angle time velocity acceleration
meter radiant seconds meters per second meters per second squared
Input file The obstacles and their maneuvers are defined in an ascii text-file with infofile syntax. Infofile syntax means keyword orientated, string or numeric values are separated from the key by “=”, text values by “:”. The hash character "#" in the first column introduces a comment line. For more details, look in the infofile documentation. If you want to use your own input syntax, you can write your own input function instead of the default Obsts_iGetObstcl().
Properties of an obstacle All the following parameters have the prefix Obstacles. The obstacles lower border lies parallel to the road surface. The vertical offset is z Road . w
obstacle
y
l s Road
y Road h s0
rear plane
birds view Parameters
.Info =
z Road
s Road
s0
y Road
3d view
InfoText
Comment, additional information
.Color =
Red Green Blue
Color of the obstacle in RGB values. Example: for a red obstacle, say 1.0 0.0 0.0.
.Kind =
ObstacleKind
The obstacle is of the kind ObstacleKind. This predefines basic characteristics like dimensions. Known kinds are: LowPerfPassCar, HighPerfPassCar, HeavySnglUnitTruck, TrailerTruck, Bus, Motorcycle. Table 12.2: Obstacle Classes (date: 2005-07-05) Obstacle Class
Length
Width
Height
zOffset
HighPerfPassCar
4.8
1.8
1.2
0.2
Motorcycle
2.0
0.6
1.0
0.2
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
295
Table 12.2: Obstacle Classes (date: 2005-07-05) Obstacle Class
Length
Width
Height
zOffset
TrailerTruck
18.0
2.5
3.2
0.3
Bus
12.0
2.5
3.4
0.2
HeavySnglUnitTruck
6.8
2.5
3.2
0.3
LowPerfPassCar
4.1
1.7
1.2
0.2
.Basics.Offset =
Off z
Off x
Off z = 0 means obstacle lies on the road surface. Positive values shift upwards. Off x = 0 means the reflection plane is the rear plane. Positive values shifts the reflection plane forwards into the obstacle. The default is 0.
.Basics.Dimension = l
w
h
Dimensions of obstacles. overall length l , overall width w and overall height h .
.Init.Road =
s Road
y Road
Initial longitudinal s Road and lateral y Road road position of obstacles rear plane. y Road is optional. Default: s Road = 0.0 m, y Road = 0.0 m.
.Init.v =
Velocity
Longitudinal initial velocity Velocity. Default is 0.0 m/s.
.Init.Orientation =
rx
ry
rz
Rotation angles rx , ry , rz for a z–y–x rotation sequence. Unit is degree.
.DrvLaps =
LapDriving
Lap driving LapDriving=1 means, if an obstacle reaches at the end of the road it disappears and reappears at the beginning of the road at s Road = 0.0m . This behaviour can be deactivated by LapDriving=0 .
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
296
B.1.1
Motion of an Obstacle The motion of an obstacle is defined by a list of column orientated mini maneuver steps. Obstacle.2.Man: t=50s t=40s t=55s t=200s
v=20m/s v=30m/s v=20m/s v=20m/s
-
-
-
-
A mini maneuver consists of •
column 1: maneuver limitation
•
column 2: longitudinal nominal motion
•
column 3: lateral nominal motion
•
column 4: longitudinal superimposed motion
•
column 5: lateral superimposed motion
Each maneuver step line must start with a tabulator character at first position.
Limitation t=<xx>s t_abs=<xx>s s=<xx>m s_abs=<xx>m
length of <xx> seconds until absolute time reaches <xx> seconds length of <xx> meters until obstacle reaches absolute road distance of <xx> meters
The kind of limitation influences the defined superimposed motion. If the maneuver step is limited by time, the superimposed period refers to the maneuver time, otherwise to distance.
Nominal longitudinal motion v=<xx>m/s a=<xx>m/s^2 s=<xx>m s_abs=<xx>m
nothing defined end velocity of <xx> m/s constant acceleration of <xx> m/s^2 distance of <xx> meters, reached at the end of the maneuver step absolute road position of <xx> meters, reached at the end of the maneuver step
Nominal lateral motion y=<xx>m
CarMaker Reference Manual
nothing defined road lateral position of <xx> meters
Version 2.1.6
297
Superimposed longitudinal motion off cont
nothing defined immediately switch off the offset created by earlier maneuvers continue with definition of previous maneuver
sinus=, sinus=0,
sinus with amplitude and period . sinus with amplitude from last maneuver and period time . The amplitude is reduced linear during this maneuver
triangle=,
triangle with amplitude at , - at 3 * and 0 at 4 *
triangle=,,,, triangle with amplitude at , at and 0 at
Superimposed lateral motion off cont
nothing defined immediately switch off the offset created by earlier maneuvers continue with definition of previous maneuver
sinus=, sinus=0,
sinus with amplitude and period time sinus with amplitude from last maneuver and period time . The amplitude is reduced linear during this maneuver
triangle=,
triangle with amplitude at t= , - at t= 3 * and 0 at t= 4 *
triangle=,,,, triangle with amplitude at t= , at t= and 0 at t=
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
298
B.1.2
Output Quantities The output quantities are components of the structure tObstVec isActive
sRoad yRoad
set to “1” as long as obstacle exists set to “0” if life time of obstacle is expired Obstacle life time is defined in the driving maneuver of the obstacle road (center line) coordinate lateral road position
LongVel LongAcc
longitudinal velocity longitudinal acceleration
Pos[3] Rot[3] TraMat[3][3]
absolute position (inertial system) rotation angles (zyx-joint) transformation matrix (transforms the obstacle frame to the inertial frame, zyx-joint) absolute velocity absolute acceleration
Vel[3] Acc[3]
Relative outputs (additional calculation!): RelPos[3] Relative position obstacle to sensor, sensor frame RelVel[3] Relative velocity, obstacle to sensor, sensor frame RelAcc[3] Relative acceleration, obstacle to sensor, sensor frame
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
299
B.2
Functions, Types and Variables Data type for defining a single obstacle typedef struct tObstcl { struct { int Kind; double LongAccMax; double LongDecMax; double LatAccMax; double VelMax; double w, h, l; double zOff; double lOff; } Basics; struct { double double double double } Init;
/* overall dimensions */
sRoad; yRoad; v; rx, ry, rz;
int DriveEndless; int nMan; tObstMan *Man; char Info[64]; } tObstcl;
Data type for the output structure of an obstacle typedef struct tObstVec { char isActive; double sRoad; /* absolute quantities */ double yRoad; double LongVel; double LongAcc; double t_0[3]; double Rot[3]; double Tr2Fr0[3][3]; double v_0[3]; double a_0[3]; double dt_S[3]; double dv_S[3]; double da_S[3]; } tObstVec;
/*relative quantities */
Sensor Interface typedef struct tObstSensIF { double sRoad; /* sensor road coordinate (estimate) */ double t_0[3]; /* sensor position Fr0 */ double v_0[3]; /* sensor velocity Fr0 */ double a_0[3]; /* sensor acceleration Fr0 */ double omega[3]; /* sensor rotational velocity Fr0 */ double alpha[3]; /* sensor rotational acceleration Fr0 */ double Tr2Fr0[3][3]; /* sensor orientation/transformation matrix “sensor to Fr0” */ } tObstSensIF;
Handle to the obstacle management typedef struct tObsts tObsts;
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
300
B.2.1
Obsts_New()
- create a new obstacle management
Synopsis
#include tObsts *Obsts_New (void)
Description
Creates a new handle to an obstacle management. A new data structure for obstacle management is created and initialized. •
Call once per simulation, before any other operation with obstacles is done.
Return values NULL != NULL
B.2.2
Obsts_ObstclNew()
Synopsis
#include
Error O.k.
- create an new obstacle
tObstcl *Obsts_ObstacleNew {void)
Description
Creates a new obstacle structure and initializes it with default values. The properties of this obstacle must be defined before it is added to the actual set of obstacles (obstacle management) by calling the function Obsts_ObstclAdd().
Return values NULL != NULL
Error (nearly impossible!) handle to an obstacle
B.2.3
Obsts_iGetObstcl()
- get obstacle from infofile
Synopsis
#include tObstcl *Obst_iGetObstcl ( const tInfos *Inf, const char *key )
Description
Initialize a new obstacle from an infofile. The parameters with the prefix, defined by the string key are used to define the properties of the obstacle. The returned obstacle can be added to the set of obstacles by calling the function Obsts_ObstclAdd().
Return values NULL != NULL
B.2.4
Obsts_ObstclAdd()
Synopsis
#include
CarMaker Reference Manual
Error handle to an obstacle
- add a new obstacle
Version 2.1.6
301
int Obsts_ObstclAdd ( tObsts *Obsts, const tObstcl *Obst )
Description
Add the obstacle Obst to the set of obstacles (obstacle management) pointed to by Obsts. After having added an obstacle to the obstacle management, his own data structure is no longer needed and can be freed by calling Obsts_ObstclDelete().
Return values -1 >= 0
B.2.5
Error O.k., obstacle added number of the added obstacle
Obsts_ObstclGetInfo()
- gets information about defined
obstacle Synopsis
#include int Obsts_ObstclGetInfo ( tObsts *Obsts, int No, tObstcl *Obst )
Description
Returns parameters of obstacle number No. Attention: Information about the driving maneuvers is not returned! Always Obst.nMan is set to 0 and Obst.Man to NULL.
Return values -1 0
Error O.k., desired obstacle exits, information is assigned to Obst
B.2.6
Obsts_ObstclDelete()
Synopsis
#include
- delete an obstacle
void Obsts_ObstacleDelete { tObstcl *Obst )
Description
Frees all memory associated by the obstacle Obst. This has nothing to do with the obstacle management!
B.2.7
Obsts_EndOfInput()
Synopsis
#include
- no additional obstacles
int Obsts_EndOfInput ( const tObsts *Obsts struct tRoad *road )
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
302
Description
Stops adding new obstacles to the obstacle management. After that time, the number of obstacles is constant. Nothing can be added or changed. Creates all internals for defined obstacles. Prepares Obst_Calc() •
Call only once per simulation.
•
Call before simulation loop starts.
Return values -3 -2 -1 >= 0
B.2.8
Obsts_ObstVecNew()
Synopsis
#include
Licence expired for Obstacles/ACC module No road defined Error O.k. number of defined obstacles
- get a obstacle output vector
int Obst_ObstVecNew ( const tObsts *Obsts, tObstVec **ObstVec )
Description
To get any information of the actual state of all obstacles, an obstacle output vector is needed. •
Call once after Obsts_EndOfInput()
•
Call before simulation loop starts
Return values -1 >= 0
CarMaker Reference Manual
Error Number of defined obstacles dimension of obstacle output vector
Version 2.1.6
303
B.2.9
Obsts_Calc()
- calculate the obstacle module
Synopsis
#include int Obsts_Calc ( const tObsts /*const*/ struct tRoad /*const*/ double /*const*/ double )
Description
*Obsts, *road T SsRoad
Calculate the absolute state of all obstacles for time T and road position SsRoad of the sensor: •
appearance/visibility
•
position and orientation
•
velocity, acceleration
SsRoad is ignored if negative. Return values -1 0
Error O.k.
B.2.10
Obsts_GetObstsAbs()
Synopsis
#include
- get absolute obstacle states
int Obsts_GetObstsAbs ( tObst *Obsts, tObstVec *ObstVec, )
Description
Calculates the absolute values of the obstacle output vector ObstVec. The relative values can be calculated by Obsts_GetObstsRel() after that. •
Call after Obsts_Calc()
•
Call each simulation step
Return values -1 0
CarMaker Reference Manual
Error O.k.
Version 2.1.6
304
B.2.11
Obsts_GetObstsRel()
Synopsis
#include
- get relative obstacle states
int Obst_CalcObstsRel ( tObst *Obsts, tObstVec *ObstVec, tObstSensIF *IF )
Description
Calculates the relative values of the obstacle output vector ObstVec respective to the given state (position, velocity, acceleration, orientation). The transformation matrix TraMat is the matrix to transform a vector defined in a local frame to the inertial system (inertial. = TraMat * local). •
Call after Obsts_Calc().
•
Call each simulation step
Return values -1 0
Error O.k.
B.2.12
Obsts_ObstVecDelete()
Synopsis
#include
- free obstacle output vector
void Obst_ObstVecDelete ( const tObstVec *ObstVec )
Description
Frees all memory allocated by Obsts_ObstVecNew(), referenced by the pointer ObstVec. •
Call once after Obsts_EndOfInput()
•
Call before simulation loop starts
Return values NULL != NULL
Error handle to an output vector with an element for each defined obstacle
B.2.13
Obsts_Delete()
- free obstacle management
Synopsis
#include void Obsts_Delete ( const tObst *Obsts )
Description
Frees all memory allocated for the obstacle management, referenced by the pointer Obsts. The set of obstacles doesn’t exist any longer. •
Call only once per simulation, after the simulation loop is finished.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
305
B.2.14
Example: Using Obstalces “by Hand” #include “infoc.h” #include “Obstacles.h” tErrorMsg *perrors; extern VehicleAbsSensor(); extern tRoad *Road; /* initialized external! */ int i, nObstacles = 0; tObsts *Obsts = NULL; tObstVec *ObstVec = NULL; tInfos *inf = InfoNew(); struct Sens { double Pos[3], Vel[3], Acc[3]; doubel Omega[3], Alpha[3], TraMat[3][3]; } Sens; /*** initialisation */ InfoRead (&perrors, inf, “obstacles.info”); nObstacles = iGetLong(inf, “nObstacles”); Obsts = Obsts_New(); for (i=0; i < nObstacles; i++) { tObstcl *obst; char key[32]; sprintf (key, “Obstacle.%d“, i); obst = Obsts_iGetObstcl(inf, key); if (obst == NULL) continue; Obsts_ObstclAdd (Obsts, obst); Obsts_ObstclDelete (obst); } InfoDelete (inf); nObstacles = Obsts_EndOfInput(Obsts,Road); i = Obsts_ObstVecNew(Obsts, &ObstVec); /*** simulation loop */ for (t=0; t
Sens.Alpha, Sens.TraMat);
/* do something with this informaitons */ .... } /*** finishing */ Obsts_ObstVecDelete (ObstVec); Obsts_Delete (Obsts);
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
306
B.3
CarMaker Interface
B.3.1
Variables CarMaker Obstacle Interface typedef enum { ObstaclesState_Unknown , ObstaclesState_Inactive , ObstaclesState_Start , ObstaclesState_Simulate , ObstaclesState_End , ObstaclesState_ShutDown , ObstaclesState_NumStates } tObstaclesState; typedef struct tObstacles { tObstaclesState State; /* state of obstacles module int nObjs; struct tObstVec *ObstVec; } tObstacles;
*/
extern struct tObstacles Obstacles;
B.3.2 Description
Obstacles_Init()
- initailizes obstacle module
Initializes the obstacle module. Called once at application start.
B.3.3
Obstacles_New()
- create obstalces
Synopsis
#include void Obstacles_New ( struct tInfos *Inf, struct tRoad *Road );
Description
Set up all obstacles of a simulation. Called once at simulation start.
B.3.4
Obstacles_Calc ()
Synopsis
#include
- calculate obstacles
void Obstacles_Calc (double dt, tObstSensIF *IF);
Description
Calculates obstacle module
B.3.5
Obstacles_Delete ()
Synopsis
#include
- delete obstacles
void Obstacles_Delete (void);
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
307
Description
B.3.6
Obstacles_Cleanup()
Synopsis
#include
- cleanup obstacle module
void Obstacles_Delete (void);
Description
Frees all memory allocated for the obstacle module. Call only once just before application ends.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
308
B.3.7
Examples: Using Obstacles by CarMaker App_TestRun_Start () { ... Obstacles_New (SimCore.TestRun.Inf, Ambient.Road); ... } App_TestRun_Calc () { ... Obstacles_Calc (dt, &Obstacles.SensIF); ... } App_TestRun_End () { ... Obstacles_Delete (); ... } App_Cleanup () { ... Obstacles_Cleanup (); ... } User_Calc (double dt) { ... if (Obstacles.State == ObstaclesState_Simulate) { /* absolute sensor position */ VehicleAbsSensor (Time, &Obstacles.SensIF); /* get the relative values referring to Sensor */ Obsts_GetObstsRel ( Obstacles.Obsts, Obstacles.ObstVec, &Obstacles.SensIF); /* do something with this informaitons */ ... } ... }
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
309
B.4
Obstacle Utility obstutil The stand alone program obstutil can simulate the defined maneuvers. The results are saved to disk. obstutil can generate the geometry definition for IPG-MOVIE for the defined obstacles.
Usage obstutil [options...]
obstacle definition file (infofile syntax)
-movie
generate the geometry object definition for IPG-MOVIE. No simulation is done after generation object definition!
-deltat <x>
simulation time step (in seconds)
-tend <x>
end time of simulation (in seconds)
-deltatfile <x>
output time step (in seconds)
-of
output file name. An file extension is added, depending on the selected file type
-filetype <s>
output file type. Possible values are “fortran” or “ascii”. Default is “fortran” binary.
-road
road segment file
-roaddigi
road digit points file
Examples •
The obstacle maneuver is defined in file example.info. The maneuver end after 100 seconds. The road is defined in the same file. obstutil -tend 100 example.info
•
Obstacle maneuvers on a digitized road obstutil -tend 100 \ -road couse.road -roaddig course.dig \ example.info
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
310
Appendix C
IPG-MOVIE
This section explain IPG-MOVIE features.
C.1
IPG-MOVIE-INFO – Meta Information in Geometry Files Starting with IPG-MOVIE 3.2, additional information specific to IPG-MOVIE may be placed in a geometry file. This information is not part of the geometry file format and will be ignored by other programs. In human-readable ASCII based formats (.geo, .roadgeo, .obj and .tclobj files) the information can be found in a comment block at the beginning of the file. In binary 3ds files this information can be appended to the end of the file (e.g. with "cat info.txt >> geo.3ds"). If necessary the information can be changed later using an editor capable of editing binary files. Two special lines "### BEGIN IPG-MOVIE-INFO" and "### END IPG-MOVIE-INFO" enclose the comment block. All lines inbetween have to start with a hash character (#) marking a comment line. Example: ### BEGIN IPG-MOVIE-INFO # Translate 2.05 0 0.61 # Scale 0.0258 0.0262 0.0256 # Rotate 90 0 0 1 # Rotate 90 1 0 0 # Include front.obj ### END IPG-MOVIE-INFO
This information is evaluated only by IPG-MOVIE and will be ignored by other programs. In most cases, after editing the geometry data with another program the extra information will be lost. Possible statements in the IPG-MOVIE-INFO block (always used with a leading "#"):
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
311
Scale sx sy sz Scaling of the x/y/z axis by sx, sy, sz. Translate x y z Translation (offset) by x, y, z. Rotate alpha x y z Rotation by an angle alpha around a vector x, y, z. TwoSided Modifies the behavior of the lightning model, so the back sides of all facets are illuminated the same way as the front sides. This may help if the orientation of some parts of your geometry is the wrong way. Most often these parts appear too dark and without diffuse/specular lights. The prefered way to correct this is to switch the orientation of the concerned normals/facets. Use this option only if this is not possible. The option was introduced in IPG-MOVIE 3.2.6 (CarMaker 2.1.6). NumPlate name x y z ry rz wi he Inserts a special "number plate" geometry object named name at position x, y, z. The texture will be loaded from file Numplate_name.png (see directory GUI/Textures of the installed product). Currently (i.e. IPG-MOVIE 3.2) only a single number plate, name=CarMaker, is supported. In a later version it is planned to allow user defined textures. The center of the rectangle sized wi x he will be positioned at x, y, z. Rotation around the y/z-axes is specified in degrees by ry, rz. ry=rz=0 denotes a number plate in the y-zplane, whose front side can be seen when looking in x-direction. Example of a rear number plate: NumPlate CarMaker 0.08 0.00 0.55 12 0 0.55 0.12
Include fname In addition to the geometry information contained in the current file, a geometry file fname will be read. The format of fname is allowed to be different from that of the current file (but, of course, must be supported by IPG-MOVIE). Relative filenames is interpreted relative to the directory of the file with the include statement. Each of the above statements may be specified multiple times. The transformations given by Scale, Translate and Rotate will be evaluated in the given order and determine the coordinate system for the all geometry data contained in the file. They also effect all following NumPlate and Include statements.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
312
Appendix D
Start Conditions
D.1
Overview In the CarMaker GUI use Simulation / Determine Start Values to take a snapshot of the vehicle state at an arbitrary time during a testrun. CarMaker will store the current vehicle state into the SimOutput//Snapshot.info file. These values could be used to setup vehicles start conditions .
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
313
Appendix E
Road-Obstacles and Markers
Road-Obstacles are geometrical items placed on the road surface to simulate local increases and decreases. Markers add certain attributes for a defined section of the road.
E.1
Description of Road-Obstacles CarMaker supports the following types of obstacles: •
Cylinders
•
Beams
•
Waves
•
Cones
To define the placement of obstacles on the road the arc length (distance) and the offset to the centerline have to be specified. Internally the coordinates of the obstacle in the inertial frame Fr0 are calculated.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
314
E.1.1
Cylinders A cylinder obstacle basically is a frustum with a circular base depicted in Figure 12.1. y
t z R0 RH
RH
y0
R0
s
s
Height
x0
x
Figure 12.1: Definition of Cylinder Obstacles
The origin is displayed by the inertial coordinates x0 and y0. A Cylinder is defined in the Markers/Obstacles dialog by the following parameters: Cylinder fric
Dist
Distance in meters from the origin of the road (measured on centerline).
y
Offset to the centerline (measured orthogonally to the direction vector).
Height
Total height of the frustum.
Radius0
Base radius.
RadiusH
Top radius.
fric
Friction coefficient of the whole obstacle.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
315
E.1.2
Beams A Beam is a barrier with a rectangular base. The overall length results of the sum of three partial lengths. The half width of the obstacle has to be specified.
y
z s
t
t l3
b
b
l2
y
l1
s
Height
-
α x0
x
-b l1
l2
l3
Figure 12.3: Definition of Beam Obstacles
A Beam is defined in the Markers/Obstacles dialog by the following parameters Beam <Width>
Dist
Distance in meters from the origin of the road (measured on centerline).
y
Offset to the centerline (measured orthogonally to the direction vector).
Angle
Angle of the beam relatively to the direction vector.
Height
Total height of the beam.
Width
Half width of the beam.
l0
Length of upward ramp.
l1
Length of plateau.
l2
Length of downward ramp.
fric
Friction coefficient of the whole obstacle.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
316
E.1.3
Waves The obstacle Wave is defined by a rectangular base. Its length is determined by the product of the wavelength and the number of periods. (x0,y0) in inertial coor-
y s len
t
b y0
-
α x0
z
(n-2) peri-
t
Heig b
s -b
-
x
0.5 l
l
(n-2) l
0.5 l
nl
Figure 12.5: Definition of Wave Obstacles
A detailed illustration of the z-profile is given in Figure 12.5. It is visible that at the beginning and at the end a transition of half a period length is added to the actual wave which starts and ends at its maximum height. In between the wave is constructed with (n-1) period length. If a wave with only one period is specified it consists only of the beginning and trailing transition. A Wave is defined in the Markers/Obstacles dialog by the following parameters Wave <Width>
Dist
Distance in meters from the origin of the road (measured on centerline).
y
Offset to the centerline (measured orthogonally to the direction vector).
Angle
Angle of the wave(s) relatively to the direction vector.
Height
Total height of the beam.
Width
Half width of the wave.
nPeriods
Total number of Periods.
PeriodLen
Length of one period.
fric
Friction coefficient of the whole obstacle.
CarMaker Reference Manual
Version 2.1.6
317
E.1.4
Cones Like the Cylinder obstacles Cones are frustums with a elliptical base.
y t
t
z
s RT H
RTH
RS 0
y0
RT0
RSH
RT 0
RS H
Height
RS0
s
α x0
x
Figure 12.7: Definition of Cone Obstacles
A Cone is defined in the Markers/Obstacles dialog by the following parameters Cone